Canon 1000S Service Manual Download Page 634

Page: 634 / 840

7-198

7. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS

<M>

<S>

<R>

<P>

<F>

ADJUST

COUNTER

OPTION

TEST

DENS

FUNC

DISP

xxxx

WINDOW-M

WINDOW-C

WINDOW-Y

3/3

xxxx

WINDOW-K

Item

WINDOW

Description

Indicates the window soiling correction coefficient.
The value decreases when the SALT sensor becomes
soiled.

Remarks

Normal if between 60 and
140.

Summary of Contents for 1000S

Page 2: ...OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER ANYQUESTIONSREGARDINGINFORMATIONCONTAINEDHEREINSHOULDBEDIRECTED TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information Prepared by OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS QUALITY ADVANCEMENT DEPT 5 OFFICE I...

Page 3: ...r Copier 1000 1000S 3100 may be configured with the following system devices 1 Preview Monitor Preview Monitor Board 2 RDF E1 3 Editor F1 4 Film Projector B1 5 Stapler Sorter F1 6 Buffer Pass Unit 1 7 Tandem Kit Tandem Board 8 Control Card V 9 Interface Board B1 B2 10 PS IPU III 11 IPU II 12 Film Scanner III 13 Copy Data Controller A1 not available in some areas 14 Paper Deck option in Japan 15 ED...

Page 4: ...on how to install the CLC1000 1000S 3100 CHAPTER 6 Maintenance and Inspection provides tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables durables as well as scheduled servicing chart CHAPTER 7 Troubleshooting Image Faults Malfunctions provides maintenance inspection standards adjustments troubleshooting image faults troubleshooting malfunctions APPENDIX contains a general timing chart general ...

Page 5: ...evel of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are e...

Page 6: ...3 4 7 13 14 9 10 11 12 6 5 1 Preview Monitor 2 RDF E1 3 Editor F1 4 Film Projector B1 5 Stapler Sorter F1 6 Buffer Pass Unit 1 7 Paper Deck option in Japan 8 Control Card V 9 Interface Board B1 B2 Preview Monitor Borad 10 PS IPU III 11 IPU II 12 Film Scanner III 13 Copy Data Controller A1 not available in some areas 14 ED Board A1 ...

Page 7: ...2 9 B Pre Fixing Charging 2 9 C Grounding Roller 2 10 D Static Eliminator 2 10 E Transfer Belt Cleaning 2 11 III LIMITATIONS 2 12 A Outline 2 12 B Characteristics 2 12 CHAPTER 3 OPERATION AND TIMING I BASIC MECHANISMS 3 1 A Functional Construction 3 1 B Outline of Electrical Circuitry 3 2 C Inputs to and Outputs from Major PCBs 3 3 D Sequence of Basic Operations 3 26 II ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 ...

Page 8: ...VIII CHARGING SYSTEM 4 78 A Primary Charging Assembly 4 78 B Separation Pre Fixing Assembly 4 79 IX PROCESS UNIT SYSTEM 4 80 A Process Unit 4 80 B Cleaning Assembly 4 85 C Developing Assembly 4 87 D Photosensitive Drum 4 90 E SALT Sensor 4 91 F No 2 Scoop Up Sheet 4 93 X FIXING SYSTEM 4 94 A Fixing Assembly 4 94 B Upper Fixing Cleaner Assembly 4 102 C Fixing Lower Cleaning Assembly 4 103 D Fixing ...

Page 9: ...n Service Mode COUNTER 6 7 III SCHEDULED SERVICING PROCEDURE 6 8 IV SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHART 6 9 CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS GUIDE TO TABLES 7 1 I MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 7 3 A Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 7 3 B Scheduled Servicing 7 5 II STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 7 7 A Image Related Parts 7 7 B Original Illuminating System 7 13 C Photosensitive Drum Related Parts ...

Page 10: ...CONTROLLER PCB A 51 F CCD DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 66 G HVT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 70 H SPECIAL TOOLS A 82 I SOLVENTS AND OILS A 84 H Variable Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes LED and Check Pins by PCB 7 170 VII SERVICE MODE 7 187 A Outline 7 187 B Control Display Mode DISPLAY 7 191 C ADJUST adjustment 7 225 D FUNCTION function inspection 7 251 E OPTION options mode 7 286 F TEST PRINT test print 7 29...

Page 11: ... GENERAL DESCRIPTION I FEATURES 1 1 II SPECIFICATIONS 1 2 A Type 1 2 B Mechanisms 1 2 C Performance 1 3 D Others 1 5 III LASER AND SAFETY MEASURES 1 9 A DHHS 1 9 B CDRH 1 9 C Points to Note When Handling the Laser Unit 1 10 IV NAMES OF PARTS 1 11 A External View 1 11 B Cross Section 1 13 C Control Panel 1 15 ...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...er deck 4000 sheets offers a source ready to supply 5000 sheets of paper 3 Automatic duplexing mechanism The built in duplexing unit enables automatic copying on both sides of sheets 4 Paper of up to 209 g Postcards and other materials of heavy stock may be used for copying 5 Various creative functions In addition to such basic creative functions as editing of hue and brightness installation of th...

Page 14: ...ve medium OPC drum 60 dia Table 1 201 B Mechanisms Copying Indirect electrostatographic Charging Corona Exposure Laser beam Contrast adjustment Automatic Development Toner projection brush development in Y M C and Bk Toner supply Manual 750 g of Y M and C 640 g of Bk Pick up 2 front cassettes special paper deck multifeeder Retention Static retention concurrent with Y transfer Transfer Blade transf...

Page 15: ...pecial LTR 279 mm x 216 mm Plainpaper 80to105g m2 transparency special Thinpaper 64to79g m2 Thin paper 64 to 79 g m2 plain paper 80 to 105 g m2 thick paper 106 to 163 g m2 including cast coated paper postcard extra thick paper 164 to 209 g m2 including cast coated paper postcard special papers 1 and 2 transparency special Plain paper 80 to 105 g m2 transparency special Thin paper 64 to 79 g m2 Pla...

Page 16: ...adjustment density range adjustment Text printed photo text halide photo text printed photo halide photo map Size position Auto paper selection auto cassette change Page separation free division enlargement separation reduced page composition w RDF two sided separation w RDF One sided to two sided two sided to two sided w RDF two sided to one sided w RDF page separation two sided Provided right le...

Page 17: ... XXXXXX CLC1000S AMS PGN XXXXXX CLC1000 ITA PHN XXXXXX CLC1000S ITA PFH XXXXXX CLC1000 general RGT XXXXXX CLC1000S general 240V QFH XXXXXX CLC1000 UK QCK XXXXXX CLC1000S UK RFH XXXXXX CLC1000 CA RCM XXXXXX CLC1000S CA Copying 3 kW or less approx A4 full color continuous Standby 0 62 kW h approx reference only 73 dB copying Sound power level by ISO 64 dB standby 1 m from machine 0 02 ppm or less av...

Page 18: ...2001 CANON INC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Figure 1 201 2013mm w paper deck 1384mm 2476mm 820mm w sorter w projector 730mm Height 1000 mm w copyboard cover 1172 mm w RDF E1 1422 mm w projector ...

Page 19: ... B4 A4R B5R Enlargement B4 A3 B5R A4R B5 A4 A4R B4 A5 B5 A4R A3 B5R B4 A5 A3 LGL 279 mm x 432 mm 11 x 17 LTRR 279 mm x 432 mm 11 x 17 MINIT LTRR A4R A3 A5 A3 B4 A3 B5R A4R B5 A4 A4R B4 A5 B5 A4R A3 B5R B4 A5 A3 Table 1 206 0 250 0 500 0 611 0 707 0 815 0 865 0 250 0 500 0 647 0 733 0 786 0 250 0 500 0 707 0 250 0 500 0 707 0 815 0 865 1 153 1 223 1 414 2 000 4 000 1 214 1 294 2 000 4 000 1 414 2 0...

Page 20: ...lossy Standard Glossy Standard Glossy Standard Glossy Standard Copying speed A4R LTR A3 A4R B4 279mm x 432mm 11 x17 15 6 9 31 12 18 24 9 4 6 6 4 4 15 31 9 21 9 12 9 4 6 21 9 12 9 4 6 9 4 6 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 Table 1 207 Copying Speed copies minute Specifications subject to change without notice REF The CLC1000 varies the fixing speed to a specific standard to pro duce the degree of shine sele...

Page 21: ...PPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUCTOLASERDECLASE1 APPARECCHIOLASERDICLASSE1 INACCORDOCONLANORMA CEI76 2 B CDRH On August 2 1976 the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the Food and Drug Administration of the U S A put an act in force to deal with laser devices Under the act laser devices manufactured on and after August 1 1976 may not be marketed in the Un...

Page 22: ... the front left door open the shutter needs to be held open using a door switch actuator Keep these in mind when such work is necessary Figure 1 303 DANGER Laser radiation when open AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE FS6 8029 CAUTION LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM FS6 8030 ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKU...

Page 23: ...SCRIPTION IV NAMES OF PARTS A External View 1 Original tray 7 Control key power switch 2 Control panel 8 Front cover right 3 Editor option 9 Cassette 1 4 Hopper cover toner supply opening 10 Cassette 2 5 Multifeeder 11 Front cover left 6 Paper deck option in Japan 12 Copy tray Figure 1 401 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ...

Page 24: ...ED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 Fixing assembly knob 7 Pre duplexing feeding assembly 2 Copy counter 8 Waste toner box 3 Front cover switch 9 Fixing delivery reversing unit 4 Hopper assembly 10 Fixing oil bottle 5 Transfer unit 11 Document holder 6 Duplexing unit Figure 1 402 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ...

Page 25: ...NTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 13 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 33 35 37 55 56 57 58 40 39 59 60 61 62 63 34 36 38 40 41 42 43 45 47 49 51 53 44 46 48 50 52 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 B Cross Section Figure 1 403 ...

Page 26: ...tion mirror 27 Y BD mirror 28 Registration roller 29 Thick paper detection roller 30 Multifeeder feeding roller 31 Multifeeder pick up roller 32 Multifeeder tray 33 Delivery vertical path roller 34 Duplexing reversal inlet roller 35 Lower fixing roller web 36 Duplexing reversal feeding roller 37 Duplexing reversal outlet roller 38 Waste toner box 39 Pre duplexing feeding assembly 40 Transfer belt ...

Page 27: ...top key 5 Pre Heat key 6 Interrupt key 7 Start key 8 Clear key 9 ID key 10 Call key 11 Pilot lamp Description Press the appropriate key to select a specific copying mode Indicates the selected copying mode or provides instructions Press it to cancel the selected copying mode thereby returning to standard mode Press it to stop continuous copying Press it to start pre heating mode or to stop it Pres...

Page 28: ...y holding at the edge Fan out each stack before setting it in a cassette or the multifeeder Remove from the tray immediately after copying to avoid jamming Keep unused transparencies in a box and store them avoiding high temperature and humidity 4 Points to Note about the Orientation of Transparencies Orient each transparency so that it is fed in the correct direction g When Placing in a Cassette ...

Page 29: ...step 1 2 3 D Primary Charging step 2 2 4 E Laser Exposure step 3 2 4 F Development step 4 2 5 G Retention Transfer step 5 2 6 H Separation step 6 2 7 I Fixing step 7 2 7 J Photosensitive Drum Cleaning 2 8 II AUXILIARY PROCESS 2 9 A Pre Primary Charging 2 9 B Pre Fixing Charging 2 9 C Grounding Roller 2 10 D Static Eliminator 2 10 E Transfer Belt Cleaning 2 11 III LIMITATIONS 2 12 A Outline 2 12 B ...

Page 30: ......

Page 31: ...rging assembly Pre exposure lamp Photosensitive drum cleaner Laser exposure Transfer belt Photosensitive drum Pre primary charging assembly Fixing assembly Pre fixing feeding Separation charging assembly Duplexing unit Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Registration roller Pre duplexing feeding Transfer belt SALT sensor Surface potential sensor Lens CCD Laser scanner Pre fixing charging assembly Transfer belt ...

Page 32: ...esenting the corresponding process color of toner complementary to the corresponding filter for transfer to paper the step is executed alike for Y M C and K The resulting image is fixed to the paper producing a color copy of the original The CLC1000 uses four photosensitive drums for transfer of images to paper and a transfer belt is used to ensure that paper is moved horizontally under each photo...

Page 33: ... the original Such an image created on the photosensitive drum using differences in potential is not visible to the human eye and is called a static latent image Figure 2 103 C Pre Exposure step 1 Figure 2 104 In preparation for primary charging the light from the pre exposure lamp is directed to the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove residual charges thereby preventing uneven copy densi...

Page 34: ...charged photosensitive drum is determined by the potential of the grid a bias is applied to the grid to ensure a specific drum surface potential E Laser Exposure step 3 Figure 2 106 A laser beam of an intensity suited to the image density of the original is directed to the surface of the photosensitive drum thereby neutralizing the charges on the surface Such areas are called the light areas of th...

Page 35: ...friction against the rotating cylinder The developer is held in the form of a brush over the surface of the cylinder within the magnetic field of the fixed magnet and is deposited in a uniform layer by a blade Figure 2 108 Double blanking pulses and a DC bias negative component are applied to the developing cylinder to improve development efficiency and reproduction of highlighted areas resulting ...

Page 36: ...m come into contact This is done by applying a high voltage constant current through a blade and onto the back of paper from behind the transfer belt The CLC1000 uses the same transfer charges to retain paper on the transfer belt For the first color Y transfer occurs at the same time as when the paper is drawn to the transfer belt by the work of transfer charges 12KHz 0V Double blanking pulses Con...

Page 37: ... Figure 2 112 Depending on the selected color mode a maximum of four transfers takes place before the paper is forwarded to the fixing assembly A pair of fixing rollers move the paper under pressure and heat thereby melting the toner particles of four colors to produce as many colors as needed reproducing the original images and fusing them into the fibers of the paper To prevent adhesion of toner...

Page 38: ...e Drum Cleaning Figure 2 113 In preparation for the next copying run the cleaning blade scrapes off the residual toner from the surface of the drum The collected toner is moved by the waste toner feeding screw to the rear of the copier and is collected in the waste toner case Photosensitive drum Waste toner feeding screw Cleaning blade ...

Page 39: ...harging to remove localized positive charges remaining on the photosensitive drum B Pre Fixing Charging Figure 2 202 The toner on the paper after separation is more or less neutralized and yet is subject to change while the paper is forwarded The CLC1000 causes its pre fixing charging assembly to apply a negative DC bias immediately after separation of paper from the transfer belt to retain the to...

Page 40: ...and thereby to increase the efficiency of cleaning performed in the next step the belt is grounded by means of a grounding roller D Static Eliminator Figure 2 204 The transfer belt after separation of paper holds residual charges that occur during transfer The static eliminator is used to remove charges from the transfer belt preparing for retention and transfer for the next copying run Actually b...

Page 41: ...Transfer belt cleaning web Polishing roller Oil removing roller Transfer belt Transfer belt cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning web Oil removing roller Polishing roller Removes toner from the transfer belt during registration control Removes oil from the transfer belt Removes oil from the transfer belt that builds up after two sided copying Roughens the surface of the transfer belt to prevent ad...

Page 42: ...e photosensitive drum is subject to the environment in which the machine is used and changes over time 2 Reflectance of Toner The ideal toners representing the primary colors yellow magenta and cyan should absorb 100 percent of the spectrum of their complementary colors and reflect 100 percent of the rest Such toners however are not available at present 3 Dry Electrostatic Photography and Gradatio...

Page 43: ...ure system 3 64 C Laser Scanner Motor 3 65 D Generating the BD Signal 3 66 E Video Controller 3 67 F Laser Driver 3 72 G Image Position Correction 3 74 V IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3 84 A Outline 3 84 B Basic Sequence of Operations image formation system 3 86 C Stabilizing Images 3 87 D Primary Charging Assembly 3 97 E Developing Assembly 3 102 F Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum 3 120 G Controlling th...

Page 44: ......

Page 45: ...inating CCD driver Analog processor PCB Image processor PCB IP memory PCB To external device Laser driver PCB Laser scanner Video controller PCB Laser exposure block BK C M Y Separation Charging Pre exposure Laser exposure Cleaning Development Transfer Charging Pre exposure Laser exposure Cleaning Development Transfer Charging Pre exposure Laser exposure Cleaning Development Transfer Charging Pre ...

Page 46: ... Lamp regulator Scanner motor driver PCB Video controller PCB Laser driver laser BD Board PCB Preview Monitor Board monitor DC controller PCB SALT sensor PCB Color toner density sensor Sensor Switch Drum motor LED front PCB for pattern reading Image position correction PCB front AC driver PCB HVT 1 2 3 4 5 Laser scanner motor Laser scanner motor driver PCB Motor Fan Clutch Solenoid Developing moto...

Page 47: ...ocessor PCB ECO PCB ECO PCB J 2001 J 2003 J 2501 J 2503 J 2502 J 1453 Interface PCB BD Y PCB Laser Y Laser driver M PCB BD M PCB Laser M Laser driver C PCB Laser driver K PCB Laser C Laser K BD C PCB BD K PCB See Chapter 3 laser exposure system J 1431 J1308 J 1303 J 1806 J 1801 J 1451 J 1452 J 2110 J 2106 J 2102 J 2107 J 2103 J 2108 J 2104 J 2109 J 2105 J 1301Y J 1301M J 1301C J 1301BK J 3251Y J 3...

Page 48: ...ng fan 2 Scanner assembly cooling fan 3 Scanner assembly cooling fan 4 5V J 1306A J 602A M 29 J 603 1 2 3 4 5 See Chapter 3 original exposure system J 602B 12 11 10 PS 37 FM 10 FM 12 FM 13 24V 8 9 FM 11 24V 24V 6 7 3 4 SCHP FM10 11D FM12D FM13D Scanner motor driver PCB When scanner No 1 mirror mount is at home position 1 When 0 FM10 11 turns ON When 0 FM12 turns ON When 0 FM13 turns ON J 1305A J 6...

Page 49: ...82 J 6283 J 6284 J 6286 J 6281 1 J 6263 1 J 6251 J 1302 2 2 Reader controller PCB 5V See Chapter 3 control panel DC controller PCB J 2206 J 1307 J 6244 J 1306B Copy Data Controller A1 PCB To Copy Data Controller A1 J 6245 J 1304 2 3 4 1 5V CCD CCDT J 6257 2 3 4 1 CC V When 0 CCV V turns ON When card is inserted 0 Serial communication IPC communication See the Service Manual for the Copy Data Contr...

Page 50: ...2 3 J 6062 1 2 3 J 6064 1 2 3 J 6065 1 2 3 J 6076 1 2 3 J 6077 1 2 3 J 2214B 3 2 1 J 2214B 6 5 4 J 2953B 3 2 1 J 2954 3 2 1 J 2954 4 5 6 J 2954 7 8 9 PS1DT PS2DT PS3DT PS4DT PS5DT DC controller PCB When paper is at PS1 1 when light blocking plate is at PS1 When paper is at PS4 1 when light blocking plate is at PS4 When paper is at 1 when light blocking plate is at PS5 When multifeeder lifter is up...

Page 51: ...7 1 2 3 J 6107 1 2 3 J 6108 1 2 3 J 6109 1 2 3 J 6110 1 8 5 6 13 J 2218B 1 J 2219A 7 J 2219B 1 J 2219A 8 PS 16 J 2219B 2 3 7 8 Alternates between 1 and 0 while transfer belt cleaning web drive motor is rotating When length of transfer belt cleaning web falls below specific value 1 light blocking plate is at PS11 When lifter of transfer belt is up 1 cut off in light blocking plate of lifter up down...

Page 52: ...T PS 28DT J 6168 1 2 3 J 6125 1 2 3 J 6126 1 2 3 J 6127 1 2 3 J 6128 1 2 3 J5500B 12 11 10 J 6129 1 2 3 9 8 7 J 6130 1 2 3 J 6131 1 2 3 6 5 4 3 2 1 J 6172 1 2 3 6 8 7 9 12 10 11 8 7 6 5 2 4 3 PS 29DT PS 30DT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2224B 7 J2224A 4 8 9 5 6 When paper is at PS21 1 when light blocking plate is at PS21 When pick up cover or paper deck is closed 1 when light blocking plate is at PS22 When ...

Page 53: ...upper fixing falls short of specific value 1 when light blocking plate is at PS36 5V PS 38 J 6273 1 2 3 PS 38DT J 2211B 9 8 7 Delivery vertical path sensor 1 When paper is at PS38 1 when light blocking plate is at PS8 PS101 PS102 SEU 1 Cassette 1 paper length sensor unit C1SZ0 C1SZ0 J 6160U 1 2 4 3 J 2226B 4 1 2 3 Paper deck lifter position sensor Paper deck upper limit switch Paper deck lower lim...

Page 54: ...er length sensor unit C2SZ0 C2SZ1 J 6160L 1 2 4 3 J 2226B 8 5 6 7 J2209B 10 TS 1 J 6337 3 2 1 YTEPU J3401A 1 2 3 TS 2 TS 8 J 6330 3 2 1 J 6332 3 2 1 YTEP 8 C toner level sensor upper CTEPU TS 3 J 6334 3 2 1 J3401B 2 Y toner level sensor lower KTEPU TS 4 J 6336 3 2 1 8 C toner level sensor lower YTEPL TS 5 J 6331 3 2 1 J3401A 5 M toner level sensor lower MTEPL TS 6 J 6333 3 2 1 11 CTEPL TS 7 J 6335...

Page 55: ...4V EPC M Potential sensor M M potential measurement PCB Y potential measurement PCB 2 1 2 3 3 150V 15V 15V 150V 15V 15V J 4604L 1 J 6219M 2 1 2 3 3 FRDC J 2212B 14 15 SW 1 Front cover switch Control key switch Waste toner lock detection switch Fixing lever switch Multifeeder open switch J 6003F 1 2 KEYSW J 2239B 1 2 SW 3 J 6026 2 1 WTBDT J 2223B 10 11 SW 4 FT 9 FT 10 F KBLK J 2223B 12 13 SW 5 FT12...

Page 56: ... sensor K J 6063 5 1 3 4 6 2 24V J 2953B 5 9 7 J 6224Y 6 4 8 EV1 Environment sensor EVRMT EVHUM EVTEMP 150V 15V 15V 150V 15V 15V J 4604R 1 J 6219K 2 1 2 3 J 2955B 6 J 2207B 10 7 8 8 10 9 6 J 6099Y J 6255C J 2216B 1 2 3 4 6 5 3 2 1 5V J 6223C 1 2 5 J 6224C 1 2 4 J 6220C 4 2 1 CT C HVT2 2 24V EPC C Potential sensor C C potential measurement PCB 150V 15V 15V 150V 15V 15V J 4603R 1 J 6219C 2 1 2 3 3 B...

Page 57: ...53F J 2951R J 2854R J 2204 See Chapter 3 laser exposure See Chapter 3 laser exposure SALT Y SALT M SALT C SALT K ATR Y ATR M ATR C J 6099M J 6099Y J 6099C J 6099K J 2228A J 2228A J 2228B J 2228B J 6158Y J 6158M J 6158C J 2229A J 2229A J 2229B SALT sensor Y Color toner density sensor Y Color toner density sensor M Color toner density sensor C SALT sensor M SALT sensor C SALT sensor K See Chapter 3 ...

Page 58: ...HON LHON When 1 cassette heater Paper deck heater turns ON When 1 Bk drum heater turns ON When 1 C drum heater turns ON When 1 M drum heater turns ON When 1 Y drum heater turns ON When 1 M30 turns ON When short circuit is detected in lower fixing heater triac 0 input signal When short circuit is detected in upper fixing heater triac 0 input signal When 0 upper fixing heater turns ON When 0 lower f...

Page 59: ...de leaves transfer belt J 2220 1 2 SL 7Y SL7YDS When 0 SL7YDS turns ON transfer blade comes into contact with transfer belt J 6101 1 2 3 SL7YDR When 0 SL7YDR turns ON transfer blade leaves transfer belt J 2220 3 Y transfer blade solenoid 4 SL 7M SL7MDS When 0 SL7MDS turns ON transfer blade comes into contact with transfer belt J 6102 1 2 3 SL7MDR When 0 SL7MDR turns ON transfer blade leaves transf...

Page 60: ... J 6169 2 1 Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid R SL 11R SL11RD When 0 SL11M turns ON J 6170 2 1 Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid L SL 11L SL11LD When 0 SL11L turns ON J 6171 2 1 13 Stopper plate solenoid 24V SL 12 J 6174 3 2 1 J 2224A 12 11 SL12DS When 0 SL12DS turns ON stopper plate shifts up SL12DR When 0 SL12DR turns ON stopper plate shifts down 10 Paper feeding roller solenoid ...

Page 61: ... opens SL17CDC When 0 SL17CDC turns ON shutter closes SALT sensor shutter open close solenoid for Bk 24V SL 17Bk J 6313 3 2 1 SL17KDO When 0 SL17BDO turns ON shutter opens SL17KVDC When 0 SL17BDC turns ON shutter closes 10 DCP1L J 5329 4 24V SL 18 SL18D When 0 SL18 turns ON Polishing roller solenoid 1 2 J6315 2 1 J2212A 6 J2212A 12 J2212A 9 J2212A 3 8 11 5 4 7 J2218B 10 CL 1 24V CL 2 Y toner suppl...

Page 62: ...11 turns ON CL 12 CL12D J 6137 2 1 Cassette 1 pick up clutch J 2222A 9 24V When 0 CL12 turns ON CL 13 CL13D J 6138 2 1 Pick up vertical path roller 2 clutch J 2222A 10 24V When 0 CL13 turns ON J 5501A 3 4 J 5501A 5 6 J 5501A 11 12 J 5501B 1 2 Pick up assembly relay PCB J 5502 9 J 5502 8 J 5502 4 J 5502 3 Multifeeder relay PCB J2207A 2 1 4 J 6049 2 1 8 1 2 2 3 3 4 7 J 2955A 14 15 12 CL 16 CL16D Whe...

Page 63: ...ling fan rear 24V J 2208B 8 9 FM 6 FM6D When 0 FM6 turns ON J 6041 1 2 J 2233 1 2 24V Primary exhaust fan Primary suction fan left Primary suction fan right FM 7 FM7D When 0 FM7 turns ON J 6073 2 1 Pre fixing feeding fan 24V J 2214A 1 2 FM 8 FM8D J 6079 2 1 J 2215B 1 2 24V When 0 FM8 turns ON FM 9 FM9D When 0 FM9 turns ON J 6080 2 1 J 2215B 3 4 24V Paper deck feeding clutch 24V CL8001 CL8002 J 222...

Page 64: ...ates between 1 and 0 while M3 is rotating M 4 Laser scanner motor Laser scanner motor driver PCB See Chapter 3 laser exposure M 5 Image position correction mirror slant correction motor for C 24V J2210A 2 5 1 3 4 6 M5 A M5 A M5 B M5 B J6043 5 2 6 4 3 1 Alternates between 1 and 0 while M5 is rotating M 6 Image position correction mirror reproduction ratio correction motor for Y 24V J2210A 8 11 7 9 ...

Page 65: ...J2218A 11 10 9 12 M15ON M15PLL M15DIR J 6100 5 6 3 2 1 4 J 2213A 8 9 10 11 24V Pick up motor J6091 2 1 J 2218A 1 4 24V Pre fixing feeding motor M12D 24V J2219A 2 5 1 3 4 6 M13 A M13 A M13 B M13 B While M11 is rotating alternates between 1 and 0 J 6105 5 2 6 4 3 1 Transfer belt swing motor J 3202 1 2 3 J2219B 4 5 6 J3203 1 2 3 4 5 J6112 1 2 3 4 5 M 9 M 11 M 15 M 10 M 12 M 13 M 14 Transfer belt moto...

Page 66: ... M 18Bk J 2223B 4 5 6 Bk developing motor M18BkPLL M18BkON J6145Y 3 2 1 M 18Y J 2226A 6 7 8 Y developing motor M18YPLL M18YON J6145M 3 2 1 M 18M J 2226A 9 10 11 M developing motor M18MPLL M18MON J6146 3 2 1 M 19 J 2223B 7 8 9 Duplexing feeding motor M19PLL M19ON J6155 3 2 1 M 20 J 2226A 1 2 3 Waste toner feeding motor M20PLL M20ON J6157 3 2 1 M 21 J 2226A 12 13 14 Photosensitive drum motor M21PLL ...

Page 67: ...5 2 1 Duplexing reversing motor J 6021Y 3 1 LA 1 LA1ON When 0 LA1 turns ON Pre exposure lamp Y 24V J 2239A 1 2 LA 2 LA2ON When 0 LA2 turns ON Pre exposure lamp M 3 4 J 6021M 3 1 LA 3 LA3ON When 0 LA3 turns ON Pre exposure lamp C 5 6 J 6021C 3 1 LA 4 LA4ON When 0 LA4 turns ON Pre exposure lamp Bk 7 8 J 6021K 3 1 24V 24V Transfer blade 24V DCP1U J 5329 4 8 J 4101 2 1 J 2218B 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 J 4102 2 3...

Page 68: ...5B 11 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 J 4602R 2 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 Primary charging assembly C 24V Primary charging assembly Bk T 4603 T 4602 J 4605 T 4605 J 4606 T 4606 HVPPRC HVGRC HVPRC HVPPRK HVGRK HVPRK When 1 respective high voltage is generated HVT3A L PCB J 2217B 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 J 4702L 2 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 24V HVDCEN K HVDC K HVAC K HVDCEN C HVDC C HVAC C When 1 respective high voltage is generated J 4703L Develop...

Page 69: ...10 11 9 13 J 5102 2 4 3 5 1 24V Separation charging assembly J 5103 HVSPAC HVSPDC HVSPEN HVACEN HVSRD When 1 pre fixing high voltage is generated HVT5 PCB J 2217B 11 10 12 J 5201 2 3 1 24V J 5103 HVPRF Pre fixing charging assembly CNT 1 CNT1D When 1 CNT1 turns ON Counter 1 24V J 2212B 7 8 CNT 2 CNT2D When 0 CNT2 turns ON Counter 2 9 CNT 3 CNT3D When 0 CNT3 turns ON Counter 3 10 CNT 4 CNT4D When 0 ...

Page 70: ...g temperature reaches 110 C a transfer belt home position search is executed at the end of which image position correction will start The fixing temperature means the surface temperature of the fixing roller reading of the thermistor indicated under ANALOG of DISPLAY in service mode WMUP STBY I NTR 180ºC 110ºC Initial potential control Temperature control Transfer belt HP search Image correction S...

Page 71: ... surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches 110 C From when the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller has reached 110 C until it reaches 180 C From the end of INTR until the Start key is pressed or the power switch is turned OFF Purpose Waits until the fixing roller warms up Executes image position correction and initial potential control Waits until a control key e g Start ke...

Page 72: ...ansferred to the paper From the end of COPY until the main motor stops Purpose Executes scanning for an original and shading correction Measures and controls the drum surface potential Picks up paper Turns ON OFF the laser according to video signals and develops and transfers specific colors Discharges paper Stabilizes the photosensitive drum sensitivity Removes charges from the transfer belt and ...

Page 73: ...en originals are exposed and when the reflected light is directed to the CCD Figure 3 201 shows a cross section of the original exposure system and Figure 3 202 shows its exterior view Figure 3 201 Figure 3 202 Original exposure system Scanning lamp Forward Lens CCD CCD driver No 1 mirror No 2 mirror No 3 mirror No 2 mirror mount No 1 mirror mount Signal plate Original scanner home position sensor...

Page 74: ...riginal standard mode marking A Shading correction B Original position detection black original detection AE measurement C Original scanning D Marking area scanning Figure 3 203 Scanning lamp Original scanner motor M29 Original scanner home position sensor PS37 Start key ON CNTR C A Scanning lamp Original scanner motor M29 Original scanner home position sensor PS37 Start key ON CNTR A B C Scanning...

Page 75: ...ition Table 3 201 The original scanner home position sensor turns on At power on At start of copying At end of original scanning During CCD adjustment service mode Figure 3 204 Original scanner home position sensor PS37 SCHP Original scanner motor Forward Reverse Operation Switches to forward movement 1 HP search at power on 2 Shading correction 3 Original detection PS37 HP Start position Original...

Page 76: ...ance and reproduction data from the image processor PCB Then in response to the start command it sends drive pulses to the scanner motor to suit these data units The scanner motor is a 5 phase stepping motor the direction and the speed of scanning are varied by changing the order of the drive pulses A through E and the frequency To rotate the motor at a high speed when the scanner is moved in reve...

Page 77: ...hen writing them to line memory reduction or repeating them when reading from line memory enlargement The reproduction ratio in the sub scanning direction is changed by moving the mirror mount fast reduction or slowly enlargement Figure 3 206 No 2 mirror mount Signal plate No 1 mirror mount Scanner home position sensor PS37 Reader controller PCB Scanner motor M29 Scanner motor drive signal Scanner...

Page 78: ...against fluctuations in voltage Figure 3 207 2 Operations a Turning ON OFF the Scanning Lamp The lamp regulator drive circuit turns OFF when LAON 0 causing the intensity control circuit and then the scanning lamp LA5 to turn OFF When LAON 1 the lamp regulator drive circuit turns ON to activate the intensity control circuit thereby turning ON the scanning lamp LA5 Lamp regulator Reader controller P...

Page 79: ...F to cut the power to the scanning lamp If an overcurrent flows because of a short circuit around the scanning lamp the fuse turns OFF thereby cutting off the power to the lamp regulator The thermal switch TP6 is used on a DC line and its contact is subject to damage upon ac tivation Do not re use it once it became activated otherwise its operation will be unpredict able c Controlling the Intensit...

Page 80: ...Analog processor PCB used to generate digital video signals from analog video signals 3 Group of PCBs used to process digital video signals image processor PCB memory PCB Preview Monitor Board Figure 3 301 CCD line sensor Analog processor PCB R G B R G B Analog video signal Digital video signal Image processor PCB IP memory PCB Preview Monitor Board ED board A1 To video controller PCB Original exp...

Page 81: ...oto converted The signal charges occurring after conversion are synchronized with the shift pulses generated by the analog processor PCB and stored temporarily in the transfer block single line then they are synchronized with the clock pulses generated by the analog processor PCB and sent to the CCD in sequence Figure 3 302 The transfer block and the output block of each line sensor consist of an ...

Page 82: ... gain correction and offset correction specifically the output voltages in the absence of light are made even offset correction and the ratio of amplification is made constant to even out the photo conversion efficiencies of CCD pixels gain adjustment The RGB video signals of the odd and even channels are integrated into a single channel in the offset correction block and are converted into 8 bit ...

Page 83: ...ing c ECO PCB provided as standard Supports the image processor PCB for image processing d IP Memory PCB provided as standard Compresses and stores images single A3 page max e ED Board A1 option The installation of this PCB enables the following image processing Framing Blanking Original type selection Gradation Color filter Base color Color conversion Coloring Text processing Texture Special effe...

Page 84: ...B by way of the image processor PCB The ED board A1 processes the image signals from the image processor PCB area processing text composition The communication with an external device e g IPU IPU II is by way of the interface Board B1 B2 which also corrects color space The Preview Monitor Board converts the YMCBk signals to which all image processing has been made into RGB signals for transmission...

Page 85: ...h selector Bit map data Bitmap data Area data Control panel Editor Y M C Bk Color space correction Background removal Y M C conversion R G B Y M C text signal Y M C Bk Y M C Bk Image compression Image memory Image expansion Output masking UCR processing Bk signal generation RGB conversion Output processing a b c d e g p p q l r k l m t n o m m l s h h i j f Y M C text signal CRT Controller Selects...

Page 86: ......

Page 87: ...nder the standard white plate and determines the correction target value See Reference Figure 3 307 b The CCD measures the light reflected by the standard white plate and generates data representing the measurement Figure 3 308 c The shading correction circuit compares the measurement data step b against the target value step a and stores the difference in memory as the shading correction value Th...

Page 88: ... lines on the copies If such a problem cannot be corrected after cleaning the standard white plate you may change the position of shading correction using ADJ S under ADJ XY in service mode b 3 Line CCD Position Matching The machine s CCD consists of three independent CCDs covered with either a R G or B filter For this reason the line image generated by each CCD at a given point in time has a disc...

Page 89: ...rs so that only the area where there is an original reflects the light of the scanning lamp to the CCD Figure 3 314 Figure 3 315 In general most originals are white paper so that the area identified as being white during scanning can be assumed to represent an original In other words a rectangle or square whose diagonal line runs between coordinates Xmin Ymin and Xmax Ymax is identified as an orig...

Page 90: ...age shifts If the RF is installed and an original is placed on the copyboard original position identification cannot be executed d Mirror Image Processing Figure 3 316 e Input Masking When light reflected by an original is separated into three colors by color separation filters RGB it would be ideal if each filter let through light of a specific range of wavelengths and blocked out light of other ...

Page 91: ...gration Figure 3 320 In the case of full integration image A which has been read by the scanner first is stored in the image memory first and integrated with image B which has been read next If image A is used as the background and image A is specified as the area image A which has been read first is stored in the image memory on the IP memory PCB and processed on the ED board by the area data fro...

Page 92: ...ine Width Identification In this block the width of the area text to which a specific pixel belongs is identified thereby enabling reproduction of naturally emphasized edges suited to the thickness of characters 3 Edge Detection In this block the position of a specific pixel is identified as being or not being along the edge of a character through comparison against adjacent pixels 4 Color Identif...

Page 93: ...ess that can be reproduced by the printer It checks the RGB data read by pre scanning and processes it so that it can fit the printer s color reproduction range With this arrangement the CLC1000 reproduces the gradation of originals much more faithfully than copiers using the conventional method Figure 3 323 Color reproduction range in photo original Color reproduction range of printer Conventiona...

Page 94: ...riginal if they tend to appear most frequently in the sample image data collected during pre scanning and in addition if the level of the R G and B signals is 200 or more Figure 3 324 Figure 3 324 Background level adjustment in user mode has two sub modes mode A and mode B each using a different method of correction In mode A only background pixels are processed the color of the background is remo...

Page 95: ...d the output of the CCD as perceived by the eye To compensate for the discrepancy level conversion is executed as shown in Figure 3 326 Figure 3 325 Figure 3 326 b BGR YMC Conversion The circuit generates Y M and C signals taking advantage of the fact that B G and R light are complementary to Y M and C toner Table 3 301 Figure 3 327 Figure 3 328 Black White CCD output 255 0 Original density 0 255 ...

Page 96: ... and light patterns repeat in high density are called high frequency components on the other hand areas where dark and light patterns repeat in low density are called low frequency components Within image data the frequency components of dotted areas fall between 5 0 and 7 0 lines mm the output gain is lowered for such components thereby evening out the dotted components and preventing moire Figur...

Page 97: ...ence in density between pixels will not vary excessively when producing enlarged copies Figure 3 331 shows image data of an original image data at time of enlargement and image data after enlargement correction Figure 3 331 Original image data writing Line memory reading Copying Reproduction ratio in main scanning direction Reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction Direct All data is written in...

Page 98: ...ding to the read signal generated in relation to the ITOP signal and sent to the image processor after the UCR processing block has generated the Bk signal The image signals from an external device are subjected to UCR processing without compression and sent to the image processor PCB For this the DRAM memory kit must be installed Figure 3 332 IP memory PCB R G B R G B Y M C Bk Y M C Bk Y M C Y M ...

Page 99: ... addition of the Bk signal to the Y M and C signals See discussions on YMC conversion Figure 3 333 The Bk signal is generated as follows The gray components of the YMC signals are as indicated in Figure 3 333 These gray components are removed and replaced with the Bk signal The replacing component used here is called an UCR amount and in the case of Figure 3 334 the UCR amount is 100 In such a cas...

Page 100: ...teristics for the B component and C toner likewise tends to have undesirable absorption characteristics for the G and the B components segments enclosed in Figure 3 336 In other words M toner if left as it is would tend to have color reproduction characteristics that include the Y component and C toner would have color reproduction characteristics that include the M and the Y components Figure 3 3...

Page 101: ...ak Setting sharpness to weak will smooth changes in the density of images making the copy image soft And if image data shown in Figure 3 337 is input the output level will be as shown Figure 3 339 with sharpness set to strong Setting sharpness to strong will emphasize changes in the density of images making the copy images crisp Figure 3 337 Input Level Figure 3 338 Sharpness Mode Set to Weak Figu...

Page 102: ...rmine which pixels of the image should be corrected In addition if a registered color has been selected by a color palette color data will be read from the bit map memory to represent the selected pixels on the image Figure 3 340 Bit map data generation Image A Color conversion Smoothing Image from scanner To image processor PCB ED Board A1 Bit map memory R G B R G B Editor Area data The area data...

Page 103: ...ion image A which has been read by the scanner is converted into binary data by the ED Board A1 then bit map data is generated based on the area data The bit map data is temporarily stored in the bit map memory and integrated with image B which has been read next Figure 3 342 Bit map data generation Bit map memory Color data e g color palette is stored Mode data Color editing Image from scanner Y ...

Page 104: ... c Color balance service mode COL ADJ d Light area offset adjustment service mode OFST under COL ADJ e Text photo mode As indicated in Figure 3 343 either a dark or light curve will be selected to suit the settings of items from a through d If text mode is selected for item e a curve that enables reproduction of dark text without risking fogging will be selected Figure 3 344 Figure 3 343 Figure 3 ...

Page 105: ...the CRT closer to each other by varying the image density signals In the image editing block the image data is rotated shifted or enlarged as specified on the control panel The area image generation block generates image data for such items as an area frame to be displayed on the CRT the initial data and the post edit data are integrated and displayed on the CRT Monitor controller PCB R G B R G B ...

Page 106: ...which is synchronized for main and sub scanning directions by the video controller are converted by the laser driver into laser drive signals that represent the level of the signals The laser beam is generated by the laser unit using this laser drive signal The laser beam comes to have scanning characteristics in a specific direction because of the polygon mirror which rotates at a high speed The ...

Page 107: ...d bottom blocks generating four channels of laser beams as shown in Figure 3 402 Figure 3 402 Since the positions of the laser units and the direction of rotation of the polygon mirror differ for M Y and C Bk the laser beam scans the photosensitive drums in the opposite directions as shown in Figure 3 403 Figure 3 403 Polygon mirror Reflecting mirror for Y Reflecting mirror for Bk Laser unit for M...

Page 108: ...ctivated in relation to the image leading edge signal to form a latent image on the drum The PWM activation period is given a delay for each color to make up for the distance between drums When the PWM activation for a single scan ends the laser turns fully for BD signal detection the next scanning operation starts when the BD signal is generated Figure 3 404 Laser scanner motor Image leading edge...

Page 109: ...ner motor drive signal SMON goes 0 If the rotation speed of the motor is at a specific value the laser scanner motor ready signal SMRDY goes 0 indicating to the DC controller that the condition is normal if the rotation speed of the motor deviates because of an error SMRDY goes 1 displaying error code E110 on the control panel Figure 3 405 DC controller M4 Laser scanner motor driver SMRDY SMON DC ...

Page 110: ...ection PCBs are used to deal with the four colors and the BD signal is generated for each channel Figure 3 406 In reference to the BD signal for each color the video signal is synchronized for the main scanning direction on the video controller PCB details follow and sent to the laser driver PCB Figure 3 407 Bk drum C drum M drum Y drum Feeding direction Bk BD detection PCB C BD detection PCB M BD...

Page 111: ...ng direction based on the ITOP signal and are subjected to gamma correction based on the conversion table in the density correction RAM See Density Correction Of the video signals after density correction the Y and the M signals are sent to a special memory for synchronization in the main scanning direction Since the main scanning direction for the C and the Bk video signals are opposite that of t...

Page 112: ... BD signal for Y M C and Bk In the sample shown in Figure 3 410 the Y main scanning sync signal YSYNC is generated in sync with the Y BD signal YBD the read enable signal YRE is generated after a specific period of time following the generation of YSYNC and the Y video signals are read from the memory for the main scanning direction May be changed used for image position correction explained later...

Page 113: ...ed from the timing chart the read enable signal for each color is given a delay for the distance between drums The video signal is forced to remain 0 until the print area signal YFRM in Figure 3 411 is generated thereby creating a leading edge margin Figure 3 411 Figure 3 412 Sub scanning sync control Density correction Y M C Bk Video controller PCB ITOP signal Print area signal Memory read signal...

Page 114: ...4 thereby bringing the output characteristics closer to the ideal characteristics Figure 3 414 The correction curve for conversion is stored in the density correction RAM on the video controller in relation to the data for SALT and PASCAL See chapter 3 V IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM C Stabilizing Image Figure 3 415 The video data YMCBk is corrected against the correction curve for correction and sent to...

Page 115: ...ng direction to generate video signals Figure 3 416 Address data for test patterns is generated in response to the ITOP signal and addresses are assigned in the RAM for gamma correction The selected video data is read from the RAM and sent to the laser driver For how to use the test patterns which are generated and sample images see chapter 7 Troubleshooting image problems Density correction Y M C...

Page 116: ...CBs has the following functions Laser Driver PCB 1 Generates the laser drive signals for 400 lines 200 lines 266 lines 2 Turns ON OFF the laser 3 Selects activation mode Laser Power Adjustment PCB 1 Monitors laser intensity 2 Generates activation current 3 Detects errors in activation current Figure 3 417 5V Laser beam Intensity monitor Laser power setting Activation current generation Signal gene...

Page 117: ...rrent Since the activation current I varies according to the ambient temperature the intensity at the point of activation is monitored at all times and the activation current is controlled so as to maintain a specific intensity The laser power adjustment mechanism used when servicing the CLC1000 varies the activation current by volumes VR1 and VR2 on the laser power adjustment PCB thereby properly...

Page 118: ...colors in the order of Y M C and then Bk Displacement of images can occur because of the following factors 1 Displacement in main scanning direction 2 Displacement in sub scanning direction 3 Discrepancy in reproduction ratio 4 Slant Figure 3 420 Feeding direction Discrepancy in main scanning direction Feeding direction Discrepancy in sub scanning direction Feeding direction Discrepancy in reprodu...

Page 119: ...lor by the CCD for reading patterns 3 Using the M pattern for reference analyzes each pattern to determine the degree of discrepancy using the CPU on the DC controller 4 Prepares correction data based on the results of analysis and imposes feedback on each factor Figure 3 421 Reproduction ratio correction motor Slant correction motor M2 M5 M7 M3 M6 M8 Video signal Amplification CCD control PCB for...

Page 120: ...erns are formed on the transfer belt using the data as when creating regular images for copies As shown in Figure 3 422 patterns are formed along the front and the rear ends in the order of Y C M and Bk and forwarded to the CCD for pattern reading Figure 3 422 The Y M C and Bk patterns are as shown in Figure 3 423 Figure 3 423 CCDs for pattern reading Y Y M C C Bk Bk M Feeding direction Y drum C d...

Page 121: ...d for both main and sub scanning directions The coordinates of the center of the pattern is computed based on the data In the case of Figure 3 425 the center in the main scanning direction is the 128th pixel and that in the sub scanning direction is the 130th line Figure 3 425 DC controller PCB Pattern LED ON signal Image data CCD front of copier Transfer belt movement Mirror Feeding direction CCD...

Page 122: ... pattern interval of 7 mm for the C and Bk patterns see Figure 3 427 Thereafter the Y pattern is formed as soon as the photosensitive drum completes a half rotation When a total of 8 sets of patterns have been made Y M C Bk the average of the data values is computed The reading by the CCD is synchronized with the periods of time that pass following the generation of the Y image print enable signal...

Page 123: ...rns the shutter drive motor remains on for 5 sec once again to move the shutter to the closed position Figure 3 429 If the shutter open sensor dose not detect the light blocking plate when the shutter must open while the motor is at rest E194 0001 will be indicated on the control panel If the shutter close sensor does not detect the light blocking plate when the shutter must close E194 0002 will b...

Page 124: ...not 0 Here correction is made so that the angle θ will be closer to 0 Figure 3 430 The correction is made by changing the tilt of the image position correction mirror thereby changing the scanning angle of the laser beam Figure 3 431 In the case of Figure 3 430 the image position correction mirror is rotated in the direction shown in Figure 3 431 so that the scanning angle will be horizontal Figur...

Page 125: ...to be incorrect Here correction is made so that Ly will be closer in value to Lm Figure 3 432 The correction is made by shifting the image position correction mirror horizontally thereby changing the length of the optical path for the laser beam Figure 3 433 In the case of Figure 3 432 the length of the optical path is increased thereby increasing the width of scanning Figure 3 433 Feeding directi...

Page 126: ... to the start of M Figure 3 434 The correction is made by changing the read timing T1 in Figure 3 435 for the Y C and Bk video signals In the case of Figure 3 434 T1 is extended thereby delaying the start of the Y image Figure 3 435 Figure 3 436 Y BD signal YBD Y main scanning direction sync signal YSYNC Y read enable signal YRE Y video signal YVD Effective pixels on CCD T1 Y M Y M C Bk C Bk Memor...

Page 127: ...orrection is made so that X will be closer to 0 In the case of Figure 3 437 the Y start position will be advanced until it is the correct position Figure 3 437 The correction is made by varying the read enable signal for the Y C and Bk video signals T2 of Figure 3 438 In the case of Figure 3 437 T2 is extended to delay the timing for the Y image start Figure 3 438 Feeding direction Y X Correct cen...

Page 128: ... is obtained by the following sensors Environment Sensor Measures the temperature humidity inside the machine Corrects the grid bias separation charging bias and transfer blade bias Potential Sensor Measures the photosensitive drum surface potential Corrects the grid bias and developing bias Color Toner Density Sensor Measures the toner density in the developer Supplies color toner SALT Sensor Mea...

Page 129: ...plate 4 HVT4 Supplies a DC AC bias to the separation charging unit 5 HVT5 Supplies a DC bias to the pre fixing charging unit The external static eliminating roller is grounded in relation to the internal static eliminating roller For details see the appropriate pages Figure 3 502 HVT2 HVT3 HVT5 HVT4 HVT1 Pre exposure lamp External static eliminating roller Internal static eliminating roller Pre pr...

Page 130: ...ontrol Potential correction SALT Drum motor Pre exposure lamp Pre primary charging bias Primary charging bias Grid bias Developing motor Y Developing motor M Developing motor C Developing motor Bk Developing bias Y Developing bias M Developing bias C Developing bias Bk Transfer belt motor Transfer current Y Transfer current M Transfer current C Transfer current Bk Internal static eliminating curre...

Page 131: ...biases are determined with reference to the data from the potential sensor during copying the grid bias is corrected based on the data from the environment sensor The grid bias and the developing bias are corrected and the laser output is corrected based on the correction data from PASCAL explained later Figure 3 505 Photosensitive drum Deterioration in sensitivity Change in charging Change in cha...

Page 132: ...deal contrast potential initial potential control thereafter the appropriate grid bias is determined each time the Start key is pressed thereby correcting changes over time potential correction Figure 3 506 See the pages that follow for details of each control mechanism The timing of control is as follows Initial Potential Control If the temperature of the fixing roller is 110 C or less when the p...

Page 133: ... discussed the timing of measurement is as follows Figure 3 509 Video signals set to 00H and FFH Power switch turned ON Vg set to 300 V Vd and VL measured Vg set to 700V Vd and VL measured Grid bias Vg and developing bias Vdc computed so as to obtain selected contrast potential Start key ON Contrast potential computed by PASCAL Vg Vd VL characteristic shown in Figure 3 508 computed based on measur...

Page 134: ...tical to the target contrast potential is detected and the point is used to obtain the target value of the grid and developing biases in the case of Figure 3 511 V1 and V2 are target values Figure 3 511 The measurement data for the surface potential may be checked in service mode Table 3 501 Vd Vdc Specific value subtracted VL Contrast potential Potential negative Vdc V1 V2 VL Grid bias Potential ...

Page 135: ... each color with reference to the measurements taken and the pre determined contrast potential The detail codes of E061 are explained below according to procedure for drum surface potential control and procedure for computation a Procedure for Drum Surface Potential Control at Power On b Procedure for Computation and Associated Detail Codes VD measured with reference to Vg Difference between VD se...

Page 136: ...0 V or more Difference of the measured value of VL2 is 30 V or more VD1 is 500 V or more and in addition VD2 is 900 V or more VD1 is 900 V or more and in addition VD2 is 900 V or more VD1 is 200 V or less and in addition VD2 is 600 V or less VD1 is 150 V or less and in addition VD2 is 300 V or less VD1 and VD2 both are 150 V or less VD1 VD2 VL1 and VL2 are all 10 V or less Difference between VD1 a...

Page 137: ...ss Difference between previous VD and newly computed VD is 30 V or more Difference between previous VG and newly computed VG is 30 V or more V00 is upper limit 950 V or more V00 is lower limit 325 V or less Possible cause Photosensitive drum deterioration Laser output inadequate Photosensitive drum deterioration Laser output inadequate Laser output excessive Grid plate faulty Photosensitive drum d...

Page 138: ...asured by the SALT sensor and the toner supply period is corrected based on the resulting measurements Figure 3 514 Figure 3 515 Y M C Bk SALT sensor SALT sensor ATR sensor Transfer belt SALT sensor SALT sensor DC controller ATR sensor ATR sensor Direct light intensity reflected light intensity signal Direct light intensity reflected light intensity signal Direct light intensity reflected light in...

Page 139: ...100 or higher measurements are taken after each 100 copies have been made Figure 3 516 The SALT sensor measures the density of toner and computations are made to find out whether the current toner density is higher or lower in comparison with the ideal density The results of computations are used to correct the toner supply amounts for the upcoming copying operations Figure 3 516A Making 4 copies ...

Page 140: ...tion Test Print 1 halftone and solid patch Figure 3 518 2 Referring to the halftone area of the generated Test Print 1 check for differences in density and faults in images if an error is found make adjustments according to the Basic Image Adjustment Procedure If no error is found operate so that the reader unit reads the solid images The data collected by reading the solid images on the Test Prin...

Page 141: ...embly The charge current for the primary corona wire and the pre primary corona wire and the grid bias is controlled by the control signal from the DC controller The change current for the primary corona wire is constant and the grid bias is varied to control the drum surface potential Figure 3 520 HVT2 2 HVT2 1 Pre primary charging assembly Control signal Primary charging assembly Grid bias Bk C ...

Page 142: ...sending pulse output to the transformer The transformer is driven Corona current sent to the primary charging assembly The output of the primary corona current is monitored with reference to its current and the data is fed back to the variable width pulse oscillator thereby ensuring that the primary corona current remains constant If an overcurrent because of leakage or example is detected the OC ...

Page 143: ...Figure 3 522 Figure 3 522 The output of the grid bias is monitored with reference to its voltage and the data is fed back to the current control circuit The feedback signal is used to ensure a specific level of grid bias If an overcurrent is detected because of leakage for example the OC signal will turn on Q1 thereby forcing off the pulse output When such occurs the grid bias will remain off for ...

Page 144: ...rona current that suits the voltage of HVPPR is generated The output of the pre primary current is monitored with reference to its current value and the data is fed back to the variable pulse oscillator circuit The feedback signal is used to ensure a specific level of pre primary corona current If overcurrent because of leakage for example is detected the pulse output is forced off the pre primary...

Page 145: ...e cleaning mechanism is activated in user mode When 5000 copies have been made since the previous cleaning operation Figure 3 525 When the control signal from the DC controller is M24FW 1 M24RV 0 the primary charging wire cleaning motor M24 is rotated clockwise for about 13 sec then when M24FW 0 M24RV 1 the motor is rotated counterclockwise for about 13 sec This sequence of operations is the same ...

Page 146: ...d C developing assemblies infrared light is shone on the toner layer on the developing assemblies and the reflected light is measured to determine the amount of toner to supply on the other hand in the case of the Bk developing assembly video signals representing the Bk component and the output of the SALT sensor are used to compute the amount of toner to supply See chapter 4 E Developing Assembly...

Page 147: ...e AC bias is generated so that it assumes the wave forms shown in Figure 3 528 Both DC and AC biases are controlled by control signals from the DC controller for application The DC bias to the stray toner collecting electrode is generated by the HVT3B and sent in response to control signals Figure 3 527 Figure 3 528 HVT3B Control signal Developing bias Bk Bk Y M C C DC controller PCB HVT3A rear M ...

Page 148: ...ff as follows Transformer drive signal HVON 1 and developing AC bias enable signal HVACEN 1 The transformer is driven and 1kV is sent to the AC bias generation circuit An AC bias is generated based on signals from the timing generation circuit When the AC bias output signal HVAC 1 the AC bias is applied to each developing cylinder Figure 3 529 HVT3A front HVT3B DC controller PCB AC bias generation...

Page 149: ...2 V is sent to the voltage control circuit The output from the transformer is controlled to suit the voltage of HVDC and is applied to the developing cylinder The DC bias output signal HVDC and the developing bias enable signal HVDCEN have four channels for each color and each of the four channels is controlled independently The changes in the developing DC bias according to different voltage valu...

Page 150: ...ff by the stray toner collection DC bias drive signal HVSRD as follows HVSRD 1 The variable width pulse oscillator circuit turns ON and pulse output is sent to the transformer The transformer is driven A DC bias is applied to the stray toner collection electrode The output of the stray toner collection DC bias is monitored with reference to its current value and the data is fed back to the variabl...

Page 151: ...hereby computing toner consumption When copying operation ends the SALT sensor measures the toner image on the photosensitive drum to find out the toner density Figure 3 532 See Figures 3 533 and 534 for sequences used to measure Y M and C toners and the Bk toner the supply operation is executed each time the measurement value falls below a specific value Measuring the Y M and C Toners Measuring t...

Page 152: ...bsorb it In other words when the amount of toner decreases because of consumption over time the reflection of infrared light will decrease because of the changing toner carrier ratio of the developer Using an infrared diode the toner carrier ratio is computed from the intensity of the infrared light reflected by the developer on the developing cylinder To make up for the deterioration occurring in...

Page 153: ...ight REF M level remains the same By comparing the reflected intensity SGNL M and its initial value a voltage corresponding to the density of the toner is computed and used as the toner density signal The intensity of the LED changes over time or according to the ambient temperature The degree of deterioration is computed by comparing the initial value and the intensity of direct light at time of ...

Page 154: ...splay mode DISPLAY Developer density DENS Item Description Reference SGNL Y Toner layer reflection intensity 700 to 912 SGNL M Toner layer reflection intensity 700 to 912 SGNL C Toner layer reflection intensity 700 to 912 REF Y Surface activation at full activation 377 to 848 REF M Surface activation at full activation 377 to 848 REF C Surface activation at full activation 377 to 848 Table 3 505 ...

Page 155: ... motor moves through the toner supply screw to supply toner to the developing assembly This operation is executed while the developing cylinder is rotating after measuring the density of toner The duration of toner supply i e during which the toner supply clutch remains on varies depending on the toner density signal Figure 3 539 M10 DC controller PCB Error detection signal YTEP MTEP CTEP Toner le...

Page 156: ... when the toner level falls below the sensor issues the message ADD TONER on the control panel when copying operation ends Figure 3 540 The rear sensors error sensors TS1 2 3 look for sensor faults or damage to the stirring rod If an error sensor TS1 2 3 detects the absence of toner while the toner level sensor TS4 5 6 detects the presence of toner E020 will be indicated on the control panel when ...

Page 157: ...plied based on the amount of consumption computed with reference to the count of the video signals carrying a Bk component As shown in Figure 3 541 the video signals from the image processor are counted to obtain a cumulative count by the video data counter Figure 3 541 Y M C Bk Y M C Bk Bk Video controller PCB Video signal Video signal Video data counter Cumulative count DC controller CL4 CL5 Ton...

Page 158: ...re are corrected in the same way as for color toner Since the window of the sensor tends to become soiled with stray toner correction is made for the dirt on the window also The LED is turned on during last rotation after copying operation and the light reflected by the surface of the photosensitive drum without a deposit of toner is read The difference between the measured value and the initial v...

Page 159: ...rum Detection of reflected light LED SGNL S K LEDON REF S K CPU Toner supply signal Toner density signal DC controller PCB Q1 Corrects for dirt on the window During copying operation the density is measured with reference to video signals Computed based on the difference between the reflected light and the initial value Various measurement data units may be checked in service mode After copying op...

Page 160: ...e Dirt on the Window The LED is turned on during last rotation LSTR after copying operation so as to measure the light reflected from the photosensitive drum without toner on it SGNL D K If the sensor window is soiled at this time the value of SGNL D K will be small The ratio of the measurement to the initial value as determined by SINIT K is stored in memory as the correction value and used to co...

Page 161: ...s so that the supply period amount will be less if the measurement is lower than the ideal density too little toner on the other hand opposite correction is made to supply a larger amount of toner Figure 3 547 The toner density is measured by the SALT sensor as follows When making single copies measurements are taken each time copying ends in continuous copying measurements are taken when all copi...

Page 162: ...density of toner inside the developing assembly is below a specific value the DC controller sends the toner supply signal to turn on the toner supply clutch As a result the drive of the Pick up motor will be transmitted to the toner supply screw to supply the developing assembly with toner The toner density signal is used to determine how long toner should be supplied i e how long the toner supply...

Page 163: ... When a specific period of time passes after toner supply operation the signal from the sensor is read by the DC controller if the absence of toner is detected the sub hopper starts to supply toner If the main hopper toner sensor TS5 detects the absence of toner eight times in a row despite toner supply operation E020 will be indicated on the control panel after copying operation Figure 3 551 Tone...

Page 164: ...er motor Figure 3 552 Photosensitive drum Waste toner feeding screw Cleaner blade M20 Waste toner feeding motor M18Bk M18C M18M M18Y Developing motor Y Developing motor Bk Developing motor M Developing motor C Waste toner bottle Waste toner feeding screw Photosensitive drum cleaner Bk Photosensitive drum cleaner C Photosensitive drum cleaner M Photosensitive drum cleaner Y Waste toner feeding moto...

Page 165: ...vided The gear A Figure 3 553 used to drive the waste toner feeding screw shifts over the shaft because of the axial force that occurs when the feeding screw locks The shift of the gear A is checked by the lock detection switch SW4 When the gear A pushes the switch the waste toner feeding motor M20 stops and E013 will be indicated on the control panel Figure 3 553 M20 Waste toner feeding motor Loc...

Page 166: ...ng current to the internal static removing roller and the charging current to the separation charging corona wire and the pre fixing charging corona wire are all controlled by the control signals from the DC controller An AC bias and a DC bias are applied to the separation corona wire only a DC bias is used for all others Figure 3 554 HVT1 Transfer blade DC controller PCB HVT5 HVT4 External static...

Page 167: ...transfer current is generated The output of transfer current is monitored by its current value and the data is fed back to the transistor Q1 The feedback signal is used to control the transformer drive voltage thereby maintaining the transfer current at a specific level If an abnormally high voltage occurs because of passage of the edge of paper for example and overcurrent is detected the OC signa...

Page 168: ...er is driven and a DC bias suited to the voltage of HVER is generated The output of the internal static current is monitored by its voltage value and the data is sent to the transistor Q1 in the form of feedback The feedback signal is used to control the transformer drive voltage thereby maintaining the internal static eliminating current to a specific level If an abnormally high voltage occurs an...

Page 169: ... to the voltage level of HVSPEDC is generated HVSPAC 1 The pulse circuit turns on and pulse output is sent to the transformer for AC The transformer for AC is driven A bias for separation is generated The DC controller PCB generates a DC component control signal HVSPDC appropriate to the type of paper plain thick transparency thin paper and the data from the environment sensor The output of the se...

Page 170: ...IME AU JAPON 3 126 Figure 3 557 HVT4 DC controller PCB Pulse oscillator circuit Transformer for DC Pulse oscillator circuit 24V 24V HVSPDC HVSPAC Transformer for AC 24V Current detection circuit Voltage detection circuit Separation charging assembly OC1 Q1 Q2 OC2 Environment sensor Thick paper sensor Feedback ...

Page 171: ...e registration roller so that its leading edge and the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum match and is then sent to the transfer belt Upon reaching the transfer belt the paper is retained against the transfer belt by the work of the charges from the transfer blade then transfer of the first color Y occurs When transfer of the fourth color ends the paper is moved through the separ...

Page 172: ...3 PS15 Pre fixing feeding assembly Photosensitive drum Bk Photosensitive drum C Photosensitive drum M Photosensitive drum Y Transfer belt PS30 Holding tray duplexing unit Feeding roller PS21 PS29 PS31 PS14 PS1 Registration roller Paper thickness roller PS2 Multifeeder pick up roller PS4 PS5 PS3 Multifeeder tray Multifeeder feeding roller Multifeeder separation roller Pick up vertical path roller 1...

Page 173: ...re holding tray feeding sensor 2 Post registration paper sensor Separation sensor Pick up vertical path 1 sensor Cassette 1 paper sensor Cassette 1 lifter sensor Pick up vertical path 2 sensor Notation PS26 PS27 PS28 PS29 PS30 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS38 Name Pick up vertical path 3 sensor Cassette 2 lifter sensor Cassette 2 lifter sensor Duplexing stacking guide home position sensor Holding tra...

Page 174: ...width detecting VR operate in association with the width guide plate and the length guide plate inside the cassette and adjusting these guides to suit the paper will establish the positions of the bosses Figure 3 603 b Detecting the Size of Paper The paper length sensor unit consists of two photointerrupters and the combination of outputs of these two sensors is used to determine the length of pap...

Page 175: ...ough M as shown in Table 3 602 Use the markings to find out if the paper guide plate is correctly set to suit the paper being used if a user calls to report skew movement This information is not made open to the user Table 3 602 Marking Paper size Remarks A STMT R B A5 R C B5 R D KLGL R E GLTR R F G LGL G3 G A4 R H LGL LTR R I FLSC G2 J B4 B5 K G LTR G1 L 279 mm 432 mm G5 11 17 LTR M A3 A4 Paper g...

Page 176: ...ime of shipment from the factory Table 3 604 e Registering the Paper Width Basic Settings See chapter 7 II Standards and Adjustments G 1 Registering the Casstte Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Setting Paper width sensor Slice level unit mm Paper length sensor Signal name ON OFF SW102 SW101 SW102 SW101 SW102 S2101 SW102 S2101 SZ2 SZ1 SZ2 SZ1 SZ2 SZ1 SZ2 SZ1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 288 5 273 7 261 8 238 0 212...

Page 177: ...aper Then the pick up roller releasing solenoid turns on so that the pick up roller leaves the surface of the paper After pick up a single sheet of paper is forwarded to the feeding path by the feeding roller and the separation roller Then the paper is moved as far as the transfer belt through the registration roller by the work of the pick up vertical path roller The notations used for the pick u...

Page 178: ...er plate drive signal SL12D Cassette 2 pick up roller drive signal CL14D Pick up vertical path roller 3 drive signal CL15D Registration roller release signal SL16D Paper thickness detection roller drive signal CL7D Registration roller drive signal CL8D Multifeeder pick up roller release signal CL6D Multifeeder pick up roller release signal SL5D Multifeeder lifter motor drive signal M1CW M1CCW SL9 ...

Page 179: ...detect the top surface of the stack of paper on the lifter When paper runs out and the paper detecting lever leaves the paper sensor the message ADD PAPER will be indicated on the control panel The notations of the lifter motor cassette lifter sensor and cassette paper sensor used for the cassettes 1 and 2 are as shown in Table 3 606 Table 3 606 Figure 3 605 Cassette 1 M16 PS24 PS23 Cassette Name ...

Page 180: ...AY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 136 Figure 3 606 M Cassette lifter motor M10 Paper Cassette paper sensor Pick up roller Paper detecting lever Pick up roller Lifter Lifter detecting lever Lifter sensor Separation roller Feeding rollers Pick up roller clutch Pick up motor ...

Page 181: ...vertical path 2 sensor PS25 Pick up vertical path 1 sensor PS21 Transparency sensor OHPS Registration paper sensor PS1 Registration roller clutch CL8 Post registration paper sensor PS14 Start key ON CNTR COPY Photosensitive drum motor M21 Pick up motor M10 Cassette 2 pick up roller clutch CL14 Cassette 4 pick up roller releasing solenoid SL10 Pick up vertical path roller 3 clutch CL15 Pick up vert...

Page 182: ...feeder pick up roller releasing solenoid SL5 turns on moving the pick up roller away from the surface of the paper A single sheet of paper is moved by the feeding roller and the separation roller to the registration roller by way of the paper thickness detecting roller The CLC1000 checks the thickness of paper when picking it up from the multifeeder thereby identifying it as being plain or thick F...

Page 183: ...e to how long the registration paper sensor PS1 remains ON The slide guide front and the slide guide rear each are equipped with a multifeeder paper sensor PS4 PS5 to check the presence absence of paper The message ADD PAPER is indicated on the control panel when either of them is off Figure 3 609 Slide guide rear Slide guide front DC controller PCB Multifeeder paper width detection signal MFPW Mu...

Page 184: ... timing so that the multifeeder lifter lowers until the multifeeder lifter sensor lower PS3 turns ON When paper is absent for supply of paper When a jam has occurred for jam removal When copying ends for supply of paper or making changes If the multifeeder lifter sensor PS2 PS3 does not turn ON within a specific period of time E040 will be indicated on the control panel Figure 3 610 DC controller ...

Page 185: ...ckness detecting roller upper when paper is not moving through the paper thickness detecting roller The difference in the angle of the light of the LED reflected by the paper thickness detection roller upper lets the paper thickness sensor to identify the shift of the paper detecting roller upper caused by the thickness of paper The shift is subjected to computation to find out the thickness of pa...

Page 186: ...rect Figure 3 612 Start key ON CNTR COPY Photosensitive drum M21 Pick up motor M10 Multifeeder paper sensor PS4 PS5 Multifeeder lifter motor M1 Multifeeder lifter sensor upper PS2 Multifeeder pick up roller releasing solenoid SL5 Paper thickness detecting roller clutch CL7 Multifeeder pick up clutch CL6 Registration paper sensor PS1 Registration roller clutch CL8 Registration releasing solenoid SL...

Page 187: ...re identified as being transparencies or not by the registration paper sensor PS1 and the transparency sensor in front of the registration roller When they are identified as transparencies the fixing speed is switched to low speed to ensure proper fixing See chapter 3 G Fixing Delivery Assembly Figure 3 613 Transparency sensor OHPS Registration roller Registration paper sensor PS1 Paper thickness ...

Page 188: ...s moved on the transfer belt the registration roller releasing solenoid SL16 turns on As a result the drive of the pick up motor is transmitted to the registration releasing arm by way of the spring clutch and the registration releasing cam causing the registration roller upper to move up and releasing its pressure The registration releasing cam makes a 1 2 rotation when the registration releasing...

Page 189: ...A4 LTR B5 80 g m2 at once and picks up and feeds paper to the copier body in response to control signals from the DC controller PCB The lifter of the paper deck is driven by the paper deck motor M8001 and paper is picked up using the drive of the copier s pick up motor M10 Figure 3 615 Paper deck Holding tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Registration roller Photosensitive drum M Photosensitive drum Y Tra...

Page 190: ...when the paper deck feeding roller clutch CL8001 turns on to forward the paper to the registration roller The registration roller controls the paper so that its leading edge and the image on the photosensitive drum match Figure 3 616 Registration roller Transparency sensor Registration paper sensor PS1 SL8001 M10 Pick up motor CL8001 CL8002 Pick up motor drive signal M10D Feeding roller drive sign...

Page 191: ...ick up from paper deck Paper Deck A4 LTR 2 Copies in Continuous 4 Color Direct Figure 3 617 CNTR Start key ON COPY Photosensitive drum motor M21 Pick up motor M10 Paper deck pick up feeding clutch CL8002 Paper deck pick up roller releasing solenoid SL8001 Registration paper sensor PS1 Paper deck feeding roller clutch CL8001 Registration roller clutch CL8 ...

Page 192: ...er stacked on the lifter When paper runs out and the sensor arm blocks the paper absent sensor PS8001 the message ADD PAPER will be indicated on the control panel At this time the lifter will move up until it pushes the lifter upper switch SW8001 and then stop On the other hand the lifter will move down until its cam pushes the lifter lower limit switch SW8002 and then stop Figure 3 618 Lifter pos...

Page 193: ...tection circuit is provided to force off the paper deck motor if a short circuit or the like allows an overcurrent to flow into the motor When the circuit has activated the copier may be reset by removing the cause and turning off and on the power switch Moving the Lifter Up The paper deck cover must be closed i e the cover open signal STDO is 0 The light blocking plate must not be over the lifter...

Page 194: ...by the CPU changes from 0 to 1 The condition causes the lifter up signal STMUP to go 0 and the lifter down signal to go 1 thereby lowering the lifter At this time the lifter will not move down to its lowest position but will stop when the top surface of paper lowers a maximum of about 12 mm Figure 3 619 Paper deck motor M8001 SW8001 PS8002 SW8002 SW8003 5V 5V 5V Paper deck lifter upper limit switc...

Page 195: ...ges of paper Figures 3 620 and 621 show diagrams of the duplexing unit and the operation of the duplexing unit Figure 3 620 Figure 3 621 Delivery vertical path assembly Duplexing reversing assembly Pre holding tray feeding assembly Transfer belt Duplexing unit Duplexing stacking assembly heater Duplexing stacking assembly Duplexing pick up assembly Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosens...

Page 196: ...ng tray duplexing unit moves up by the drive from the duplexing unit pick up solenoid SL8 the stopper plate on the other hand shifts up by the drive of the duplexing unit stopper plate solenoid SL18 The above condition is maintained until paper arrives When paper is brought to the duplexing unit stacking assembly by the drive of the duplexing feeding motor M19 the feeding roller lowers to butt the...

Page 197: ...623 PS32 PS33 PS8 PS9 PS30 PS29 PS31 PS21 SL13 SL8 Duplexing pick up roller releasing solenoid Feeding roller solenoid M19 Duplexing feeding motor SL12 Stopper plate solenoid SL11L SL11R SL11S Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoids M28 M20 Duplexing reversing motor Waste toner feeding motor Deflecting sheet CL16 Reversal drive clutch ...

Page 198: ...path may be any of four created by three paper deflecting plates Each paper deflecting plate is driven by its own solenoid Table 3 607 The CLC1000 s two sided copying mode does not accommodate A5 size and the paper de flecting plate found on the farthest right of Figure 3 624 is not used Table 3 607 Figure 3 624 SL11L SL11R SL11S 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 279 mm x 432 mm 11 17 A3 B4 LGL A4R LTR R LTR A4 B5R...

Page 199: ...29 The DC controller PCB then sends pulses in numbers appropriate to the size of paper to the motor In response the motor starts to rotate clockwise to move the paper guide plate to suit the copy size Then the motor rotates counterclockwise to stop the paper size at a point about 8 mm each side away from the edge of the coming paper When the paper arrives at the duplexing unit stacking assembly th...

Page 200: ...N INC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 156 Figure 3 626 Putting Paper in Place Paper guide plate rear 8mm 8mm Paper Paper guide plate rear CW rotation 8mm 8mm CCW rotation NO YES CW rotation Last copy ...

Page 201: ...r M21 Internal delivery sensor PS35 Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid SL14 Waste toner motor M20 Duplexing reversing motor M28 Duplexing feeding motor M19 Pre holding tray feeding sensor 1 PS8 Delivery vertical path sensor 2 PS32 Delivery vertical path sensor 1 PS38 Duplexing reversal sensor PS33 Pre holding tray feeding sensor 2 PS9 Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid SL11 see Note S...

Page 202: ...ted to the pick up roller starting pick up operation After pick up the duplexing pick up roller releasing solenoid SL8 operates to move the pick up roller away from the surface of the paper A single sheet of paper is fed into the pick up vertical path assembly by the feeding roller and the separation roller Figure 3 628 shows an outline of pick up operation from the duplexing unit Figure 3 628 Pho...

Page 203: ...s 4 Color Direct Figure 3 629 Start key ON 2nd side CNTR COPY Photosensitive drum motor M21 Holding tray paper sensor 2 PS31 Duplexing pick up roller clutch CL10 Pick up vertical path 1 sensor PS21 Registration paper sensor PS1 Transparency sensor OHPS Duplexing pick up roller releasing solenoid SL8 Pick up vertical path roller 1 clutch CL11 Registration roller clutch CL8 Registration releasing so...

Page 204: ...e position of the transfer belt Corrects displacement of the transfer belt Operates the lifter of the transfer belt Cleans the transfer belt Figure 3 630 Photosensitive drum Bk Photosensitive drum C Photosensitive drum M Photosensitive drum Y Paper Driven roller Swinging roller Pick Up motor Signal plate Cam Oil removing roller Polishing oil removing motor Polishing roller solenoid Transfer belt c...

Page 205: ...nd at the same time generates the transfer belt motor reference pulse signal M14PLS When M14D and M14PLS are input to the motor drive pulse generator circuit on the transfer belt motor driver PCB motor drive pulses are sent to the motor drive circuit causing the transfer belt to rotate at a specific speed Figure 3 631 M14 Motor drive circuit Motor drive pulse generator circuit Transfer belt motor ...

Page 206: ...ransfer belt When the registration roller clutch CL8 turns on the transfer blade is put in transfer position for retention of paper and transfer The transfer blade is put in and out of position by the drive of the transfer blade solenoid SL7Y SL7M SL7C SL7Bk The transfer blade solenoid is a latching type which can hold its steel core out or in by switching the drive signal without the need for ret...

Page 207: ... adversely affect the images because of uneven charging efficiency To prevent such a problem a seam detection sticker is put on the transfer belt When the Start key is pressed the transfer belt home position sensor PS16 detects the seal so as to control the timing at which the registration roller turns on thereby making sure that paper will not be put over the seam See Figure 3 633 If for some rea...

Page 208: ...ansparency Matte Standard Glossy Standard Matte Standard Glossy Standard Glossy Standard Glossy Standard Glossy Standard Glossy Standard Source of paper One sided two sided Type of paper Shine Mode of retention to transfer belt A3 279 mmx432 mm 11 x17 E B G G H G H G G G G G G A4R B4 F C E G B E B E E G G G G Cassette One sided Table 3 609 Duplexing unit Multifeeder One sided two sided 2nd side Pl...

Page 209: ...er Belt A4 A3 A3 A3 A4R A4R B4 Mode A 31 cpm Mode B 12 cpm Mode C 18 cpm A4 Mode D 15 cpm Mode E 6 cpm A4R B4 A4 A4 Mode F 9 cpm Mode G 4 cpm 543 1320 Seam Seam Seam 1st rotation 2nd rotation 3rd rotation 15 15 15 15 15 15 264 264 264 249 132 645 660 645 425 440 440 440 352 264 513 528 528 528 1320 1320 777 645 880 880 132 1320 Feeding direction Figure 3 634A ...

Page 210: ...AU JAPON 3 166 A4 A3 Mode H 9 cpm Mode I 21 cpm 543 1320 1st rotation 2nd rotation 3rd rotation 15 15 132 132 645 675 645 675 330 315 345 330 330 330 315 345 Seam Seam Seam Feedimg direction Mode J 24 cpm 15 15 132 330 315 345 330 330 330 330 315 345 unit mm Copy speed Revolution of Transfer Belt A4 Figure 3 634B ...

Page 211: ...nd sensor 3 front PS19 and the transfer belt end sensor 4 rear PS20 are used See Figures 3 635 636 and 637 for diagrams of the mechanism used to correct displacement of the transfer belt from detecting displacement to moving the swing roller If the CPU on the DC controller PCB detects the activation of each of the sensors under the following conditions E075 will be indicated on the control panel T...

Page 212: ...36 b Displacement to the Front The transfer belt swing motor operates the drive arm to move the swing roller to the left thereby returning the transfer belt to the rear Figure 3 637 The transfer belt swing motor is fixed in position to the transfer unit M14 Transfer belt motor Transfer belt Transfer belt rotation direction Transfer belt swing motor M13 Drive arm Swing roller Fulcrum Linked roller ...

Page 213: ...has been measured the transfer belt is moved up back to the point of transfer The lifter movement is monitored with reference to the light blocking plate mounted to the cam shaft detected by the transfer belt lifter sensor 1 PS12 and the transfer belt lifter sensor 2 PS13 See Table 3 610 If the transfer belt lifter does not reach a specific point over a specific period of time after the transfer b...

Page 214: ... 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 170 Table 3 610 Transfer belt position Lower escape position Upper normal position Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 PS12 H L Transfer belt lifter sensor 2 PS13 L H H Light blocking plate over the sensor ...

Page 215: ... oil a cleaning mechanism is installed See Figure 3 639 Figure 3 639 Photosensitive drum Bk Photosensitive drum C Photosensitive drum M SL18 Photosensitive drum Y Drive roller M12 Oil removing roller Polishing oil removing motor Polishing roller solenoid Polishing roller Transfer belt cleaning web Transfer belt PS10 PS11 Transfer belt cleaning web motor Transfer belt cleaning blade solenoid Transf...

Page 216: ...ansfer cleaning blade solenoid SL6 only at the time of image position correction Once set to position the cleaning blade remains as is but moves away from the transfer belt released over the seam The transfer cleaning blade solenoid is a latching type which can keep its steel core out or in to suit either of two drive signals without the need for retention current Figure 3 640 Transfer belt Transf...

Page 217: ...cleaning web rotation sensor PS10 which monitors the clock plate on the external static eliminating roller shaft The length of the web is monitored by the transfer belt cleaning web length sensor PS11 mounted to the web feeding roller assembly After indicating a message the web rotation sensor PS10 will detect faulty rotation of the web motor if the web runs out because of continued copying indica...

Page 218: ... solenoid SL18 turns on rotating the cam through the control ring and operating the push on spring The polishing roller is moved away from the transfer belt when the solenoid turns off to move the cam before it meets the seam The polishing roller rotates slightly to change its position of contact against the transfer belt when the operation of the transfer belt lifter pushes the one way clutch lev...

Page 219: ...ogging To prevent such a problem the oil removing roller is used to remove fixing oil from the transfer belt in two sided copying mode or when paper is picked up from the multifeeder The oil removing roller is rotated and butted against the transfer belt when the polishing oil removing motor M15 rotates counterclockwise The oil removing roller is released as the transfer belt is moved down by the ...

Page 220: ...nsfer belt cleaning web motor M12 Separation sensor PS15 ON for each 210 sec rotation of transfer belt ON or OFF Note Transfer blade set Transfer blade set Transfer blade set Transfer blade set Transfer blade escape Transfer blade escape Transfer blade escape Transfer blade escape Polishing oil removing motor M15 CW oil removal Power switch ON WMUPR INTR STBY Transfer belt home position sensor PS1...

Page 221: ...ing feeding motor M11 to rotate two feeding belts to move paper To improve paper movement the pre fixing feeding fan FM7 is used to keep copy stable on the belt from behind the feeding belt The feeding speed is switched over six steps to suit the fixing speed thereby ensuring proper fixing when making two sided copies or when copying on transparencies For feeding speed see chapter 3 G Fixing Deliv...

Page 222: ... fixing web is driven by the upper fixing web take up solenoid SL3 and the lower web is driven by the lower fixing web motor M30 In addition the lower fixing roller is equipped with a spring locking type cleaning blade The separation claw used to prevent wrapping of paper round the lower fixing roller is operated to move away from the lower fixing roller by the drive of the separation claw solenoi...

Page 223: ...During STBY controlled to 180 C During pre heat controlled to 180 C Figure 3 647 M30 DC controller PCB CPU Upper fixing heater drive signal UHON Lower fixing heater drive signal LHON Triac error detection signal TERR Lower fixing web motor drive signal M30D Upper fixing roller surface temperature detection signal THM1 Lower fixing roller surface temperature detection signal THM2 Power to DC contro...

Page 224: ... short circuit 230 C equivalent if it detects a short circuit or if the thermistor doe not register about 50 C or more two to three minutes after the fixing heater has turned on it sends the power switch OFF signal PWOFF to turn off the power switch SW2 If the internal temperature of the thermal switch of the upper fixing roller exceeds 230 C or the internal temperature of the thermal switch of th...

Page 225: ...r fixing roller when the upper fixing web releasing solenoid SL4 tuns on b Lower Fixing Web The lower fixing web is used to clean the lower fixing roller by the drive of the lower fixing web motor M30 The lower fixing web motor takes up the lower fixing web by 0 05 mm for each sheet of paper The dirt that remained after cleaning by the web is scraped by the lower fixing blade of a spring pressure ...

Page 226: ... oil applying roller remains in contact with the upper fixing roller at all times preventing offset by supplying fixing oil to the roller The silicone oil inside the oil tank is drawn to the upper oil pan by the work of the oil pump solenoid SL2 Such impurities as paper lint in the oil circulating in the fixing assembly is remove by the felt of the oil applying roller and the filter inside the oil...

Page 227: ... detect the level in reference to the moving arm If the oil level sensor does not detect the arm at power on the oil pump solenoid repeats turning on and off until the arm is detected If the arm is still not detected after operating the oil pump solenoid for 10 min the Add Oil message will be indicated on the control panel Figure 3 649 Upper oil pan Oil applying roller Upper fixing roller Oil leve...

Page 228: ... by the thermistor THM1 the thermistor is moved back and forth along the axis of the upper fixing roller over a distance of 12 mm The thermistor is moved back and forth by transmitting the drive from the upper fixing web take up solenoid SL3 through a one way arm to the reciprocating cam Figure 3 650 SL3 Upper fixing take up solenoid 12mm Reciprocating cam Upper fixing roller Thermistor THM1 Therm...

Page 229: ...roviding a glossy effect Two sided 2nd side Transparency Plain paper 105 g Thick paper 106 to 157 g Thick paper 158 to 209 g Transparency Single copying Continuous single copying Continuous single copying Continuous single copying Continuous single copying Continuous single copying Continuous single copying Source of paper One sided two sided Type of paper Continuous single copying Cassette paper ...

Page 230: ...fic value by comparing the feedback clock signal M9CLK from the fixing motor against the reference pulse signal To switch the speed of the fixing motor fixing speed the frequency of the reference pulse signal is varied The DC controller PCB indicates E014 on the control panel if an error is found in the fixing motor as identified by the following signals The speed of rotation of the fixing motor d...

Page 231: ...g to jamming if left as is during feeding or when picking up for the second side in two sided copying mode The de curling roller found between the fixing roller and the delivery roller is used to remove curling thereby limiting pick up feeding faults in two sided copying Figure 3 652 9 Retracting the Separation Claw The CLC1000 moves the separation claw away from the lower fixing roller by the dri...

Page 232: ...roller on the other hand is changed as soon as the leading edge of paper reaches the separation sensor PS15 it returns to its initial speed as soon as the paper has left the internal delivery sensor PS35 Start key ON CNTR COPY LSTR STBY STBY Power switch ON 110ºC WMUP INTR 180ºC Photosensitive drum motor M21 Pre fixing feeding motor M11 Fixing motor M9 Upper fixing web releasing solenoid SL4 Upper...

Page 233: ...3 sensor PS26 Registration paper sensor PS1 Post registration paper sensor PS14 Separation sensor PS15 Internal delivery sensor PS35 Delivery sensor PS34 Delivery vertical path 1 sensor PS38 Delivery vertical path 2 sensor PS32 Duplexing reversal sensor PS33 Pre holding tray paper sensor 1 PS8 Pre holding tray paper sensor 2 PS9 Holding tray paper sensor 1 PS30 Holding tray paper sensor 2 PS31 Fig...

Page 234: ...d not reset these settings after opening the front cover for jam removal The CLC1000 will assume the presence of a jam if any one of the sensors is on when the power is turned on If paper is left behind where there is no paper sensor on the transfer belt for example a jam is identified when the paper turns on a sensor while being moved by the drive of warm up operation If a jam occurs during conti...

Page 235: ...livery vertical path 1 sensor PS38 Delivery vertical path 2 sensor PS32 Duplexing reversal sensor PS33 Pre holding tray feeding sensor 1 PS8 Pre holding tray feeding sensor 2 PS9 Holding tray paper sensor 1 PS30 Holding tray paper sensor 2 PS31 Note Duplexing reversal motor M28 Start key ON Delay jam check normal if paper found Stationary jam normal if paper not found unit sec 1 0 1 0 1 6 3 2 0 4 ...

Page 236: ...able of displaying 200 x 640 dots of information tenkey PCB and a sub key PCB including a pilot lamp the control panel has the following functions 1 Data communication 2 LCD processing 3 LCD contrast adjustment 4 Touch switch input B Operation 1 Data Communication Data communications are controlled by the CPU on the reader controller PCB Figure 3 701 Pilot lamp Tenkey PCB Sub key PCB LCD panel Con...

Page 237: ...rforms ON OFF control over the display as programmed The LCD controller writes display character codes in the RAM for display memory in sequence the RAM data is then displayed on the display panel in response to the timing signal generated by the LCD controller 3 Adjusting the LCD Contrast VR5301 is mounted on the control panel relay PCB and may be used to adjust the contrast of the LCD panel Figu...

Page 238: ... has a matrix of 12 rows and 20 columns of keys When the surface of the top plate is pressed by a finger the two plates of glass come into contact to allow electrical continuity A pair of electrodes are connected and as in the case of a conventional matrix X Y coordinates may be identified In other words the correspondence between a key scan signal from the control panel controller circuit and an ...

Page 239: ...pen switch presses the top tablet the CPU on the control PCB applies pulses to the electrode wires through both decoder of tablets as in 1 2 n 1 n n 1 and so forth The contact between a pulse and the pen switch results in a static bond and the level of voltage is read into the controller PCB through the pen switch Figure 3 801 The voltage is then converted by the A D converter circuit on the contr...

Page 240: ...cific sequence 1 n 1 n n 1 Maximum value Vn occurs at the nth electrode wire L L n 1 L wire interval Vn Vn 1 Vn Vn 1 S is obtained and x is computed from the data table through reverse operation L x mm is obtained When n n 1 When n n 1 CPU Decoder X Decoder Y Amplifica tion Peak hold Vn 1 Vn Vn 1 A D converter Controller PCB Output to the copier L n 1 x n 1 n 1 Vn 1 Vn 1 Vn n 1 line pitch Figure 3...

Page 241: ...B or the tablet of the editor you must set the DIP switch on the controller PCB as indicated on the label attached to the cable of the tablet Figures 3 803 and 804 After setting the DIP switch make adjustments under EDADJ X Y in service mode if discrepancy is found in input coordinates Figure 3 803 Figure 3 804 Display Sample Tablet Label 1 Correction value SW ON OFF Example setting value 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 242: ...exhaust ozone draw stray toner and cool parts Figure 3 901 shows the locations of the fans Table 3 901 shows the function of each fan and the filter used as well as the orientation of the fan Figures 3 901 through 904 show when each of these fans is tuned on Figure 3 901 FM5 FM6 FM8 FM9 FM4 FM16 FM17 FM18 FM20 FM19 PUFM1 PUFM2 FM1 FM3 FM13 FM10 FM11 FM2 FM12 FM7 FM15 FM14 ...

Page 243: ...er delivery cooling fan 2 Power supply cooling fan 3 Power supply cooling fan 4 Notation FM 1 FM 2 FM 3 FM 4 FM 5 FM 6 FM 7 FM 8 FM 9 FM 10 FM 11 FM 12 FM 13 FM 14 FM 15 FM 16 FM 17 FM 18 FM 19 FM 20 PUFM 1 PUFM 2 Filter Dust proofing filter Dust proofing filter Ozone filter Toner filter None Dust proofing fan None Dust proofing filter None Dust proofing filter Ozone filter Dust proofing filter Du...

Page 244: ...ing fan FM4 5 Digital unit cooling fan FM14 15 16 Primary exhaust fan FM6 Primary suction fan FM8 9 Delivery assembly cooling fan FM1 2 3 Pre fixing feeding fan FM7 Lower delivery cooling fan FM19 20 Scanner assembly cooling fan FM10 11 12 13 WMUP INTR STBY CNTR COPY LSTR STBY 4 min 4 min 4 min Full speed 1 2 speed 1 2 speed 1 1 1 3 2 Primary suction fan FM8 9 Delivery assembly cooling fan FM1 2 3...

Page 245: ...ation of the cassette heater using service mode As long as the power saving switch is on the cassette heater turns on according to the settings even when the power switch is off Since the DC power to the DC controller PCB and the reader controller PCB is cut off when the power switch is turned off these PCBs are equipped with a lithium battery for their RAMs Table 3 1001 B Protection Mechanisms fo...

Page 246: ...ower supply PCB 1 lower DC power supply PCB 1 upper DC power supply PCB 2 Power switch SW2 Power saving switch SW8 Lamp regulator TP5 TP4 T1 TP3 TP1 TP2 TP6 Scanning lamp LA5 Holding tray heater Y drum heater M drum heater C drum heater Bk drum heater Fixing relay RL1 Lower fixing heater Upper fixing heater Upper fixing heater triac TR1 Fixing web drive motor M30 Lower fixing heater triac TR2 AC d...

Page 247: ... A1 PCB CC V To projector 24V 24V 24V 24V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 15V Developing motor Y M C K Transfer belt motor driver PCB Fan FM14 to 17 To RF Scanner motor driver PCB Motor M15 Interface motherboard PCB IP EC O PCB IP memory PCB Image processor PCB Video controller PCB Image position correction PCB front Analog processor PCB CCD driver PCB BD PCB Y M C K Solenoid SL6 7 M C Y K Soleno...

Page 248: ... 24V 24V HVT3A R HVT3A L HVT2 1 HVT2 2 HVT3B HVT4 HVT5 Fan FM1 to 9 Solenoid SL2 to 4 11 S M L 12 to 16 17 M C Y K Motor M2 3 5 to 8 11 to 13 23 28 Multifeeder relay PCB Pick up assembly relay PCB Clutch CL6 to 8 Clutch CL10 to 15 Clutch CL1 to 5 16 17 Solenoid SL5 Solenoid SL8 to 10 24VR 24VR 9VR 9VR 9VR 9VR 24VR 24VR 24VR 24VR 24VR 24VR 24VR 24VR 24VR 5V 5V 5V Sensor PTS1 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V...

Page 249: ...e floor in front of the machine to prevent soiling with falling toner 8 Keep the following in mind when handling the CCD unit for image position correction Do not touch the LED assembly or the dust proofing glass Do not subject the unit as a hole to a shock as it is adjusted to high optical precision Do not apply excessive force when holding the unit to avoid deforming the shutter assembly 9 Keep ...

Page 250: ...otor 4 15 3 Routing the Scanner Cable 4 15 E Fixing Drive Assembly 4 18 1 Removing the Fixing Drive Assembly Fixing Motor 4 18 F WasteToner Feeding Drive Assembly 4 19 1 Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Drive Assembly Waste Toner Motor 4 19 2 Removing the WasteToner Feeding Pipe Screw 4 20 III PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 4 21 A Paper Deck 4 21 1 Removing the Paper Deck 4 21 2 Removing the Cover 4 21 3 ...

Page 251: ...Removing the Oil Removing Roller 4 54 5 Removing the Polishing Roller 4 54 C Replacing the Separation Paper Guides Static Eliminating Wire 4 55 V EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4 56 A Original Exposure System 4 56 1 RemovingtheScanningLamp 4 56 2 Orientation of the Scanning Lamp 4 56 3 Removing the Standard White Plate 4 57 4 Removing the Lens Mount Cover CCD Cover and CCD Unit 4 57 5 Removing the Scanner Cover ...

Page 252: ...y 4 94 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 4 94 2 Opening the Upper Fixing Roller Unit 4 95 3 Removing the Upper Fixing Heater 4 96 4 Removing the Lower Fixing Heater 4 97 5 Removing the Upper Fixing Roller 4 97 6 Removing the Lower Fixing Roller 4 98 7 Removing the FixingThermistor upper Method 1 4 98 8 Removing the Fixing Thermistor upper Method 2 4 99 9 Removing the Fixing Thermistor lower 4 99 10 R...

Page 253: ...ving the ECO Board 4 111 11 Removing the Analog Processor 4 111 12 Removing the Image Processor PCB and the Memory PCB 4 112 13 Removing the Video Controller PCB 4 113 14 Removing the Polygon Motor Driver 4 113 15 Removing the Potential Sensor Unit 4 114 16 Removing the Image Position Correction Pattern CCD Unit 4 115 17 Cleaning the Shutter 4 116 18 Cleaning the LED 4 116 19 Removing the Transfer...

Page 254: ......

Page 255: ... MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 1 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM I EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS A Covers 1 External Covers and Copyboard Glass 2 8 9 10 11 29 28 25 23 24 27 30 13 14 18 5 3 20 21 19 1 4 6 7 31 22 26 16 17 15 12 Figure 4 101A Figure 4 102A ...

Page 256: ...board glass 19 Hopper upper cover 20 Front cover right 21 Front cover left 22 IPU cover 23 Cassette right cover 24 Cassette lower cover 25 Paper deck front cover 26 Paper deck rear cover 27 Paper deck cover 28 Paper deck upper cover 29 Multifeeder cover 1 30 Multifeeder cover 2 31 Copy tray 2 Internal Covers Figure 4 103A 1 Hopper left cover 1 2 Counter cover 2 3 Hopper right cover 1 4 Hopper lowe...

Page 257: ...e Control Panel 1 Remove the left cover 2 Remove the three screws 1 Figure 4 101B 3 Remove the hopper left and right covers 2 Figure 4 102B 4 Remove the two hopper fixing screws 3 Figure 4 103B 5 Slide out the hopper assembly 4 to the front Figure 4 104B 6 Lift the control panel and disconnect the connector then remove the control panel 1 2 2 3 4 ...

Page 258: ...d the air filter 3 Remove the four screws 1 and remove the fan unit 2 Figure 4 101C 4 Remove the four screws each and remove the fans from the fan unit 3 Removing the Laser Cooling Fan FM4 5 Removing the Air Filters 1 Remove the multifeeder cover 1 2 2 Remove the air filters 1 1 1 2 Figure 4 102C Removing the Laser Cooling Fan 1 Shift up the digital unit 2 Remove the three screws 1 each and remove...

Page 259: ...ws 1 and remove the filter cover 2 Figure 4 104C 2 Remove the the two screws 3 and remove the filter cover 4 Figure 4 105C Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan FM17 18 1 Remove the rear cover 1 2 2 Disconnect the three connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then remove the fan mount 3 Figure 4 106C 3 Remove the four screws 4 and remove the power supply cooling fan 5 Figure 4 107C 2 1 1 3 4 1 1...

Page 260: ... 1 and remove the filter cover 2 of the rear cover 1 Figure 4 108C 2 Remove the ozone filter 3 Figure 4 109C Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan 1 Remove the rear cover 1 2 Remove the screw 1 and open the DC controller PCB 3 Disconnect the connector 2 and remove the two screws 3 then draw out the fan assembly 4 Figure 4 110C 4 Remove the three screws 5 and remove the fan 6 Figure 4 111C 1 2 3 1 2 3 3...

Page 261: ...the filters Removing the Primary Suction Fan 1 Remove the rear cover 2 2 Disconnect the connectors 1 one each and remove the four screws 2 each then remove the fan 3 Figure 4 113C 7 Removing the Scanner Suction Fan FM12 13 1 Shift up the digital unit 2 Remove the two screws 1 and shift the analog processor PCB 2 Figure 4 114C 3 Remove the three mounting screws 4 and disconnect the two connectors 5...

Page 262: ... 11 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Remove the scanner left cover 3 Remove the seven screws 1 and remove the left stay 2 Figure 4 117C 4 Disconnect the connectors 3 one each and remove the two screws 4 each then remove the fan 5 Figure 4 118C 9 Removing the Digital Unit Cooling Fan FM14 15 16 Removing the Filter 1 Remove the two screws and remove the multifeeder cover 1 2 Remove the filters 1 Figur...

Page 263: ...igital unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the two screws 2 then remove the fan 3 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 1 10 Removing the Pre Fixing Feeding Fan FM7 1 Remove the two screws and remove the counter cover 2 Remove the pre fixing feeding assembly 3 Remove the four screws 1 and remove the fan 2 Figure 4 122C 11 Removing the Delivery Assembly Lower Fan 1 Remove the left cover 2 Disconne...

Page 264: ...each and remove the two fly wheels 2 Figure 4 201A 3 Slide out the process unit 4 Remove the two screws 3 each and remove the drum heater terminal cover 4 Figure 4 202A 5 Remove the two screws 5 each and loosen the tensioner plate 6 four points then detach the four belts from the drum drive assembly pulleys Figure 4 203A 6 Disconnect the two connectors 7 and four screws 8 then remove the drum driv...

Page 265: ...ll the drum drive belt 2 so that the markings 1 on the drum drive pulleys are all in the same direction Figure 4 206A B Developing Motor Assembly 1 Removing the Developing Motor Assembly 1 Remove the rear cover 1 and the rear cover 2 2 Remove the two screws and remove the fly wheel left This applies only when removing the M developing motor assembly 3 Remove the two screws 1 each and disconnect th...

Page 266: ...cover 1 and the rear cover 2 2 Remove the two screws and remove the fly wheel left This applies only when removing the M developing motor 3 Remove the four screws each 1 and disconnect the two connectors each 2 then remove the developing motor 3 Figure 4 203B C Pick Up Drive Assembly 1 Outline See Figure 4 201C for how the pick up drive belt is routed Figure 4 201C 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 267: ...nect the four connectors 1 and remove the three screws 2 then remove the pick up motor driver PCB 3 together with the support plate Figure 4 202C 3 Loosen the two screws 4 to loosen the tensioner plate 5 then detach the drive belt 6 Figure 4 203C 4 Remove the pick up assembly 5 Remove the screw 7 from the pick up relay PCB and remove the two screws 8 from the pick up drive assembly Figure 4 204C 2...

Page 268: ...the connector 10 then remove the pick up drive assembly 11 Figure 4 205C 3 Removing the Pick Up Motor 1 Remove the pick up drive assembly 2 Loosen the three screws 1 and shift the tension roller 2 then detach the timing belt 3 from the pulley 4 3 Remove the four screws 6 grip ring 5 and pulley 4 then remove the pick up motor Figure 4 206C 9 9 11 9 10 1 3 4 1 1 2 5 6 ...

Page 269: ...Remove the two screws 6 and remove the O ring 7 from the scanner motor 2 1 3 5 4 6 7 Figure 4 203D 2 Adjusting the Belt Tension When Installing the Scanner Motor 1 When tightening the screw be sure that the belt is free of slack i e move the motor to the right 3 Routing the Scanner Cable Keep the mirror positioning tool FY9 3002 000 near at hand when routing the scanner cable 1 Remove the left cov...

Page 270: ...4 204D rear 5 Fit the binding screw 3 M4x8 to the pulley shaft 4 so that the pulley may be temporarily fixed to the side plates 5 found at the front and the rear of the pulley thereby temporarily fixing the No 2 mirror mount in place Figure 4 205D front 1 2 1 2 5 4 3 5 3 4 5 6 8 4 2 1 3 Fix in place temporarily Put the steel ball into the hole Wind 8 times Figure 4 206D 6 Route the scanner cable o...

Page 271: ...02 000 and extend the arm 6 fully Figure 4 208D 9 Install the mirror positioning tool 7 between the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 mirror mount and insert the pin 8 that comes with the mirror positioning tool Figure 4 209D Figure 4 210D 10 Install the metal fixing 10 of the scanner cable to the No 1 mirror mount using the hole in the side plate with two screws 9 Figure 4 211D 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 9 10 F...

Page 272: ...re ad justment of the cable tension E Fixing Drive Assembly 1 Removing the Fixing Drive Assembly Fixing Motor 1 Remove the rear cover 1 2 Remove the screw and open the DC controller PCB 3 Remove the two screws 1 and disconnect the four connectors 2 then remove the fixing motor driver 3 Figure 4 201E 4 Remove the five screws 4 and remove the fixing drive assembly 5 Figure 4 202E 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 ...

Page 273: ...03E F Waste Toner Feeding Drive Assembly 1 Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Drive Assembly Waste Toner Motor 1 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then remove the waste toner motor 3 6 6 7 8 9 Figure 4 201F 2 Disconnect the connector 4 and remove the four screws 5 then slide out the waste toner feeding assembly 6 to the front while shifting it to the right Figure 4 202F 1 ...

Page 274: ... 1 and free the top plate 2 of the power supply assembly Figure 4 203F 4 Remove the two screws 3 and pull out the waste toner feeding vertical pipe 4 by shifting it to the bottom Figure 4 204F Figure 4 205F 6 Remove the two fastons 6 of the micro switch and remove the three screws 7 then pull out the waste toner feeding screw drive assembly 8 and the waste toner pipe 9 toward the right front 5 Det...

Page 275: ...he paper deck from the copier 2 Slide out the paper deck 3 Remove the fixing screws 1 from the rail front rear of the paper deck Figure 4 303A 2 Remove the four mounting screws 5 and remove the paper deck top cover 4 Figure 4 301A 2 Removing the Cover 1 Remove the four mounting screws 3 each and remove the paper deck front cover 1 and the paper deck rear cover 2 Figure 4 302A Figure 4 304A 1 1 2 3...

Page 276: ...gure 4 305A 2 Open the paper deck cover and remove the resin E ring 4 at the front and the resin E ring 4 at the rear then remove the pick up roller 5 Figure 4 306A Figure 4 307A 4 Removing the Pick Up Feeding Roller 1 Remove the four screws and disconnect the connector then remove the paper deck heater 2 Remove the pick up roller from the front 3 Pull out the push lock used to fix the side guide ...

Page 277: ...sembly cover 8 Figure 4 311A 7 Remove the resin E ring 9 8 While pushing down the separation roller assembly 10 remove the timing belt 11 and remove the pick up feeding roller assembly 12 2 1 6 5 4 7 8 Figure 4 312A Orientation of the Pick Up Feeding Roller The pick up feeding roller rotates in a specific direction When installing the pick up feeding roller install it so that the marking shown in ...

Page 278: ...om the front of the separation roller assembly then pull out the separation roller shaft 8 from the separation roller assembly to remove the separation roller 9 Figure 4 316A Orientation of the Separation Roller The separation roller rotates in a specific direction 1 When installing the separation rubber roller make sure that the marking shown in Figure 4 317A is toward the coupling rear of machin...

Page 279: ...ller If pick up faults occur or double feeding occurs frequently change the position of the spring hooked on the retard stay 1 If pick up faults failure occur increase the pressure 2 If double feeding occurs decrease the pressure Figure 4 319A Standard A move to the next hole results in a pressure change of about 50 g Decrease the pressure Increase the pressure Spring Retard stay ...

Page 280: ...k and cause the lifter to move up 3 Place a ruler or the like on the paper and check the position by butting the ruler against the separation plate on the pick up side Mounting plate Pick up roller 4 0 1mm Adjusting screw Surface of paper Place one sheet on the paper deck Pick up roller releasing solenoid Figure 4 321A 4 If the paper surface is not as indicated loosen the adjusting screw on the pa...

Page 281: ... up motor 1 Put A4 or LTR copy paper in the cassette 1 2 2 Turn on the power and wait until warm up ends 3 Set the copy count to 1 on the control panel 4 Start service mode and select FUNK P UP TMG 5 Press PK ADJ U Pick up starts from the cassette 1 6 Repeat the operation two more times 7 Press D SEND U The measurement data will be written to the DC controller 8 Press PK ADJ L Pick up starts from ...

Page 282: ...s toward the front of the machine Figure 4 303B The pick up roller is identified by the color of its collar as follows front gold rear silver b Do not remove the rubber por tion of the pick up roller from the collar 3 Removing the Feeding Roller 1 Remove the pick up assembly 2 Remove the screw 1 and remove the upper guide 2 2 1 Front of machine Figure 4 304B 3 Remove the screw 3 and remove the pic...

Page 283: ...belt pick up roller shaft 8 Figure 4 307B 4 Removing the Pick Up Assembly Separation Roller 1 Remove the pick up assembly 2 Remove the screw 2 and remove the lower guide 1 5 6 7 8 9 1 When removing the pick up roller shaft or the like take extra care not to damage the sensors found around the part 2 When installing the feeding roller 1 to the pick up assembly in stall it so that the gear 2 of the ...

Page 284: ...ller shaft 6 and remove the separation roller 7 Figure 4 311B 5 Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure 1 Remove the pick up assembly 2 Remove the screw 2 and remove the lower guide 1 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 4 312B 3 If double feeding or pick up faults occur during pick up operation adjust the position of the pressure spring 4 of the separation roller 3 If double feeding occurs hook the spring on A If p...

Page 285: ...to lower it Figure 4 315B 8 Left Right Registration 1 Select ATTRACT under FUNC in service mode 2 Select the pick up assembly using ATT SLCT 3 Press ATT ON Paper will be picked up automatically and remain attracted to the transfer belt At this time make adjustments so that the distance L between the paper edge front of paper 1 and the front plate 3 of the transfer unit 2 is 74 7 0 5 mm If LTR 83 7...

Page 286: ...esin and remove the pick up roller 2 together with the collar Figure 4 318B 5 4 Front side plate 2 2 1 1 a When installing the pick up roller 1 install it so that the round marking 2 on the rubber portion s toward the front of the ma chine Figure 4 319B The pick up roller is identified by the color of the collar front gold rear silver b Do not remove the rubber por tion of the pick up roller from ...

Page 287: ...20B 4 Pull out the feeding roller 5 together with the belt 4 Figure 4 321B 11 Removing the Duplexing Feeding Roller 2 1 Remove the pick up assembly and open the pick up assembly cover 2 Remove the screw 1 and remove rhe positioning pin 2 3 Remove the registration roller 2 inlet guide 3 2 3 1 5 4 When installing the feeding roller 1 to the pick up assembly install it so that the gear 2 on the feedi...

Page 288: ...he rear to remove Figure 4 324B 6 Remove the two E rings 7 7 Shift the two feeding roller 2 bushings 8 toward the inside and remove them together with the shaft 9 Figure 4 325B 8 Remove the two E rings 10 resin and the gear 11 and remove the feeding roller 2 from the shaft Figure 4 326B The gear is fixed in place to the feeding roller 2 shaft with a parallel pin Take care not to drop the pin 4 4 5...

Page 289: ...remove the four screws 4 then remove the multifeeder tray assembly 5 Figure 4 302C 2 Removing the Multifeeder Assembly 1 Remove the multifeeder tray assembly 2 Disconnect the four connectors 1 and remove the two screws 2 then shift the multifeeder assembly 3 in the direction of the arrow and remove it to the front Figure 4 303C 3 Removing the Multifeeder Assembly Pick Up Roller 1 Remove the two sc...

Page 290: ... pick up roller shaft 6 5 Remove the E ring 7 resin and remove the feeding roller 8 and the separation roller 9 in sequence Figure 4 306C 5 Adjusting the Separation Roller 1 Remove the multifeeder tray assembly 2 Remove the three screws and remove the upper guide plate and the lower guide plate 3 If double feeding or pick up faults occur during pick up operation adjust the position of the pressure...

Page 291: ...r D Duplexing Unit 1 Removing the Duplexing Unit 1 Remove the front right cover 2 Slide out the duplexing unit 3 Remove the waste toner cover 4 Remove the screw 1 one each and the left and right stoppers 2 then remove the duplexing unit 3 Figure 4 301D 2 Removing the Duplexing Assembly Feeding Roller 1 Remove the duplexing unit 2 Remove the two grip rings 1 and remove the two paper feeding rollers...

Page 292: ...onnect the two connectors 2 and shift the pre fixing feeding assembly 3 to the front and slide it out from the delivery side Figure 4 302E F Pre Duplexing Feeding Assembly 1 Removing the Pre Duplexing Feeding Assembly 1 Open the front cover and release the pre duplexing feeding assembly 2 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the grip 2 and the plate 3 from the pre duplexing feeding assembly 1 2 3 Fi...

Page 293: ...nit and remove the screw 6 Figure 4 303F 5 Slide out the transfer belt unit and remove the screw 7 Figure 4 304F 6 Remove the pre fixing feeding assembly 7 Disconnect the connector 8 and remove the connector support plate 10 Figure 4 305F 8 Move the pre fixing feeding assembly to the front then slide it to the delivery side to remove 6 7 8 9 10 ...

Page 294: ... 2 and open the external and internal delivery units then disconnect the two connectors 3 and pull out the delivery reversing assembly 4 to the left side Figure 4 302G 2 Removing the Fixing Separation Claw 1 Open the front cover left and slide out the fixing unit then open the external and internal delivery units 2 Remove the screw 1 and remove the delivery sensor assembly 2 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 5 3 4 Fi...

Page 295: ...COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 41 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 5 6 4 Remove the spring 5 and remove the separation claw 6 Figure 4 305G ...

Page 296: ...the pre transfer cover 2 4 Turn the cam 5 by hand so that the belt unit 6 is in up position Figure 4 401A 3 While pulling the lever 3 on the bottom of the transfer unit toward the front set the transfer releasing lever 4 Figure 4 402A 2 1 1 4 3 Figure 4 403A 5 Turn the knob 7 clockwise halfway and pull out the transfer blade assembly 8 Figure 4 404A 6 Turn the knob 7 counterclockwise halfway to un...

Page 297: ...nt free paper with bottom to top motions or clean it with a blower brush 3 While pulling the lever 3 toward the front set the transfer releasing lever 4 Figure 4 405Ab 2 Opening the Transfer Belt Assembly 1 Remove the hopper left cover and the separation charging assembly and install the transfer frame metal fixing 1 to the front side plate Figure 4 406A 2 Remove the two screws and remove the pre ...

Page 298: ...he pin 14 on the transfer frame metal fixing 1 into the hole 15 in the transfer belt assembly 13 by lifting the transfer belt assembly 13 slightly At this time make sure that the transfer belt assembly 13 is securely in the slit 16 in the pin 14 Figure 4 409A 6 Release the separation guide 12 Figure 4 410A 7 Hold as shown in Figure 4 411A and open the transfer belt assembly 13 Figure 4 411A Figure...

Page 299: ...move it to the rear to remove 4 Open the transfer belt assembly See the instructions on how to open the transfer belt assembly 5 Loosen the mounting screw 5 and free the sensor unit fixing plate 4 Figure 4 413A 3 Remove the three screws 2 and remove the grounding roller unit 3 Figure 4 414Aa 1 2 3 Figure 4 414Ab 6 Push down the sensor unit 6 and butt the sensor unit fixing plate 4 in the direction...

Page 300: ...per guide 8 9 Push in the transfer unit assembly 11 toward the rear until it hits the rear lightly at this time take care not to force it farther than it moves Figure 4 415A 8 Remove the three screws 9 and remove the transfer frame front support plate 10 Figure 4 416A Figure 4 417A 10 To protect the transfer belt 12 place A3 paper 13 as shown Figure 4 418A 8 7 9 10 9 11 12 13 ...

Page 301: ...TEM 11 Remove the screw 14 and pull out the metal fixing 15 at the front Figure 4 421A 13 Pull out the transfer belt 12 to the front Figure 4 419A 12 Loosen the screw 16 and while pulling the rear releasing lever 17 in the direction of the arrow bend the link roller assembly 18 Figure 4 420A rear 15 14 18 16 17 18 ...

Page 302: ...mbly as shown and loosen the fixing screw 1 on the rear releasing lever 4 Remove the mounting screw 5 and release the metal fixing front 4 Figure 4 422A 3 Move and place the transfer belt assembly as shown and remove the mounting screw 3 then remove the transfer belt assembly inlet plate 2 Figure 4 423A Figure 4 424A 5 Release the rear releasing lever 6 Figure 4 425A 6 Bend the link roller assembl...

Page 303: ...sfer belt is toward the rear 2 If the transfer belt is soiled wipe it with a moist cloth or with lint free paper moistened with alco hol Be sure that the belt is com pletely dry before installing it back to the machine 3 Avoid touching the surface es pecially the area coming into contact with copy paper 4 If you have removed or replaced the transfer belt execute FUNC F MISCp E075 RLS in ser vice m...

Page 304: ...then remove the belt swing motor 3 Figure 4 429A 6 Removing the Transfer Belt Assembly 1 Open the front cover and slide out the transfer unit assembly to the front 2 Open the transfer belt assembly See chapter 4 IV Transfer Unit A 2 Opening the Transfer Belt Assembly 3 Remove the three screws 3 and remove the transfer frame front support plate 4 If you have removed or replaced the transfer belt mo...

Page 305: ...nating Roller 1 Slide out the transfer unit assembly to the front 2 Remove the transfer front cover See chapter 4 IV Transfer Unit A 1a Removing the Transfer Blade 3 Set the transfer releasing lever 4 Remove the two screws 2 and remove the transfer rear cover 1 Figure 4 432A 8 Installing the Transfer Belt Motor 1 Install the transfer belt using the steps used to remove it but only in reverse 2 Ins...

Page 306: ...a blower brush and dry wipe the roller with lint free paper 12 Cleaning the Transfer Belt Seam Detecting Sticker 1 Release the separation paper guide 2 Turn the transfer belt drive roller 1 to move the transfer belt 2 until the seam 3 is at the top as shown Figure 4 436A 10 Removing the Grounding Roller 1 Draw out the transfer unit 2 Remove the three screws 1 and remove the grounding roller unit 2...

Page 307: ...e the light emitting and receiving faces of the transfer belt home position sensor 1 with lint free paper Figure 4 441A 3 After installing the belt execute FUNC F MISCp E075 RLS in service mode to initialize the transfer belt swing data B Transfer Belt Mount 1 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Blade 1 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the cleaning blade 2 4 10mm 45mm 1 Figure 4 401B 2 When Replacing...

Page 308: ...re 4 403B 2 Remove the E ring 4 resin and remove the cleaning blade support shaft 5 3 Remove the web fixing bushing 6 and remove the transfer cleaning web Figure 4 404B 4 Removing the Oil Removing Roller 1 Remove the mounting screw 2 and remove the metal fixing 1 and the bushing 3 then remove the oil removing roller 4 3 1 2 4 5 6 Figure 4 405B 5 Removing the Polishing Roller 1 Remove the screw 1 a...

Page 309: ...he Separation Paper Guide Static Eliminating Wire 1 Shift up the separation paper guide 1 and move it to the rear to remove Figure 4 401C 2 Remove the screw 2 and remove the guide plate 3 Figure 4 402C Figure 4 403C 1 3 2 5 5 4 3 Remove the spring 4 and replace the wire 5 Make sure that the wire is under the protrusions of the ribs ...

Page 310: ...g lamp so that the boss 1 in the middle of the lamp is in the direction of the arrow for the longer side make sure that the logo mark is toward the rear Figure 4 501A 4 Turn a flat blade screwdriver in the direction of arrow 3 to open the electrode plate in the direction of arrow 4 thereby removing the scanning lamp Figure 4 502A 1 Do not work until the surface of the scanning lamp has cooled 2 Do...

Page 311: ...ove the two screws 1 and remove the vertical size plate 2 4 Removing the Lens Mount Cover CCD Cover and CCD Unit 1 Disconnect the power plug 2 Remove the copyboard glass 3 Remove the four screws 1 and remove the lens mount cover Figure 4 504A 3 Remove the two screws 3 and remove the standard white plate 4 Figure 4 505A 1 2 3 3 4 Figure 4 506A 4 Remove the CCD cover 2 Figure 4 507A 1 1 2 ...

Page 312: ...move the copyboard glass 3 Remove the four screws 1 and remove the scanner cover Figure 4 508A 6 Lift the CCD unit and disconnect the two connectors J2001 5 J2003 6 then remove the grounding wire mounting screw 7 and remove the CCD unit Figure 4 509A 3 4 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 4 510A 1 1 2 1 Move the mirror mount fully to the left 2 Take care not to damage the power wire 3 of the scanning lamp Figure 4 ...

Page 313: ...nsitive drum that corresponds to the pre exposure lamp to be removed 4 Cover the other developing assemblies cleaning units and photosensitive drums with paper 5 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the two connectors 3 then pull out the primary charging assembly rail 3 to the front At this time take care not to drop the primary charging assembly rail Figure 4 501B 6 Remove the screw and slide out th...

Page 314: ...r right upper rear right cover and digital covers 1 2 3 and 4 2 Remove the two fixing screws 2 of the digital unit 1 then lift it in the direction of the arrow and fix it in position as shown in Figure 4 601A Figure 4 601A fixing screw Figure 4 602A fixing position 3 Remove the two screws 3 and remove the analog processor PCB 4 then fix it in place in the hooking hole 5 with a screw 6 1 2 2 1 Figu...

Page 315: ...unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the two screws 2 w hex hole then remove the laser unit 3 7 7 8 10 10 10 10 9 Figure 4 607A 3 Points to Note When Installing the Laser Unit When installing the laser unit to the laser mount at the factory focus adjustment is performed and the adjustment value is recorded in the label attached to the laser mount If you have replaced the laser unit in the ...

Page 316: ...il the distance to the end 4 of the lens assembly is 27 3 0 2 mm i e where the markings match Figure 4 609A 3 Perform focusing adjustments by turning the lens assembly once again according to the values recorded on the label For instance if the value is 2 8 turn the lens assembly in the positive direction counterclockwise when viewing from the end of the lens assembly over two notches Figure 4 610...

Page 317: ...driver PCB then remove the three screws 2 M4 on the laser scanner motor assembly 3 Feed the harness 3 of the connector removed in step 2 under the laser scanner motor 4 Lift the laser scanner motor 4 and disconnect the two connectors 5 at this time work paying attention to the dust proofing glass of the motor assembly and the lens found on the left and the right of the motor Figure 4 612A Do not r...

Page 318: ...wo cable mounting screws 1 and the cable clamp 2 then remove the two cover mounting screws 3 and remove the image position correcting mirror cover right 4 3 Disconnect the two connectors 5 and remove the five screws 6 then remove the Y image position correcting mirror unit 7 Take care not to drop the washers from the screws Figure 4 601B Figure 4 602B rear Figure 4 603B front 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 A...

Page 319: ...3 Removing and Installing the Motors for the Y Image Correcting Mirror Removing the Tilt Correcting Motor M2 1 Remove the Y image position correcting mirror unit 2 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the motor 2 Figure 4 604B rear Figure 4 605B front Figure 4 606B Removing the Ratio Correcting Motor M3 1 Remove the Y image position correcting mirror unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the ...

Page 320: ...e 4 608B 4 Shifting the Scanner Unit 1 Remove the scanner retainer right upper rear right cover and digital covers 1 2 3 and 4 2 Keep the digital unit where it should be fixed in place See chapter 4 VI LASER SYSTEM A 1 Making Preparation for Laser Unit Related Parts 3 Disconnect the two connectors 1 on the analog processor PCB and remove the two screws 2 then remove the analog processor PCB 3 Figu...

Page 321: ... 4 67 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 6 Disconnect the three connectors 8 Figure 4 612B 7 Remove the two stepped screws 9 Figure 4 613B 8 Remove the left cover 9 Remove the two screws 10 and shift the control panel 11 to the front Figure 4 614B 10 Remove the five screws 12 Figure 4 615B 8 9 9 10 11 12 12 ...

Page 322: ...tors 1 and remove the two screws 2 then remove the mirror cover right 3 Figure 4 617B 4 As in the case of the Y image position correcting mirror unit remove the three screws to remove the M image position correcting mirror unit 6 Removing the C Bk Image Position Correcting Mirror Unit 1 Shift the scanner unit See chapter 4 V EXPOSURE SYSTEM B 4 Shifting the Scanner Unit 2 Remove the two screws 1 a...

Page 323: ...l it out to the front 8 Removing the BD Unit C Bk BD Unit 1 Remove the primary high voltage transformer unit 2 Remove the lamp regulator 3 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and disconnect the five connectors 2 then remove the fan mount 3 Figure 4 619B When installing the dust proofing glass 1 insert it by forcing it in the direction of arrow A then push it down in the direction of arrow B to set F...

Page 324: ... 6 Figure 4 623B 6 Remove the screw 7 and disconnect the connector 8 then remove the BD unit 9 Figure 4 624B Y M BD Unit 1 Lift the hopper assembly See chapter 4 VII HOPPER SYSTEM A 1 Removing the Hopper Assembly 2 Remove one screw each 1 and remove the unit cover 2 from the front 6 7 8 9 Figure 4 625B 3 Mark the position of the unit support plate 3 Figure 4 626B 1 2 3 ...

Page 325: ...2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 71 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 4 Remove the screw 4 and disconnect the connector 5 then remove the BD unit 6 4 5 6 You must execute FUNC INSTALL REG APER in service mode whenever you have installed the BD unit Figure 4 627B ...

Page 326: ...and remove the two fixing screws 3 of the hopper assembly Figure 4 701A 2 Hold the left and right grips 4 and while pulling to the front lift the hopper assembly Figure 4 702A 3 Remove the screw 5 from the right grip assembly Figure 4 703A 4 Install the hopper middle position metal fixing 6 left right Figure 4 704A Make a visual check to be sure that the locking mechanism under the hopper assembly...

Page 327: ... position metal fixing 8 installed in step 4 is located 8 Secure the hopper assembly 8 to the midway metal fixing left right with screw each 10 Figure 4 706A 7 Remove the screw 9 from the left grip assembly Figure 4 708A 9 Lift the right end of the control panel and push in the slider 11 to remove the control panel Figure 4 707A Figure 4 709A 10 Lift the hopper assembly by holding it on its top le...

Page 328: ...y from tumbling down 3 Removing the Hoppers 1 Remove the hopper assembly 2 Remove the hopper lower front cover and keep a screwdriver through the hole See chapter 4 VII HOPPER SYSTEM A 2 Keeping the Hopper Assembly from Tumbling Down 3 Remove the five screws 1 and remove the hopper top unit cover 2 Figure 4 710A Figure 4 711A 4 In the case of Y M C hopper remove the screw 3 and E ring 4 and discon...

Page 329: ...he Bk hopper remove the screw 7 and the E ring 8 and disconnect the two connectors 9 from the front then remove two screws 10 from the back Figure 4 715A Figure 4 714A Figure 4 716A When installing the hopper take ex tra care so that the toner supply shutter 1 will not interfere with the gear of the drive unit otherwise toner may spill 6 9 8 7 9 10 1 ...

Page 330: ... sensor In the case of a color toner hopper 4 disconnect the connector 5 and remove the two screws 6 sub toner level sensor Figure 4 717A 2 Hold the left and right grips and lift the hopper assembly while pulling it to the front 3 Remove the four screws 2 and remove the hopper lower front cover 3 Figure 4 718A Figure 4 719A In the case of the main toner level sensor 7 remove the hopper then discon...

Page 331: ...black toner main hopper 9 remove the two drive gears 10 then disconnect one connector each 11 and remove the two mounting screws 12 each Pay attention to the E ring C ring and internal parallel pin In the case of the sub hopper toner sensor 13 remove the two mounting screws 14 Figure 4 721A Figure 4 722A Figure 4 723A 10 9 12 11 13 14 14 ...

Page 332: ...ft the hopper assembly 2 Pull out the primary charging assembly 3 Removing the Grid Plate 1 While pushing the knob 1 remove the grid plate 2 4 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Pad 1 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the shielding plate 2 from the primary charging assembly Figure 4 801A Do not clean the grid plate or the primary charging wire If images are not even in density or fau...

Page 333: ... 1 Removing the Separation Pre Fixing Assembly 1 Open the left and right front covers and emove the hopper left cover then pull out the separation pre fixing charging assembly 1 1 connector 2 1 mounting screw 3 Figure 4 801B 2 Routing the Gut Wire Route the gut wire as shown in Figure 4 802B 2 1 3 Screw w washer Gut wire Screw w washer Figure 4 802B ...

Page 334: ...lease the transfer belt from the photosensitive drum Figure 4 901A 2 Lift the hopper unit 3 Remove the four primary charging assemblies 2 Figure 4 902A 4 Remove the four positioning knobs 3 of the photosensitive drum Turn the smaller knob in the middle counterclockwise If you have removed the primary charging assembly be sure to place it so that the grid face is up Figure 4 903A 5 Remove the two s...

Page 335: ...ON 4 81 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 6 Install the two process unit grips 7 Figure 4 905A 7 Slide out the process unit 4 fully to the front Figure 4 906A 2 Removing the Developing Assembly Cleaning Unit 1 Remove the screw 1 w spring Figure 4 907A 2 Pull out the positioning pin 2 Figure 4 908A 7 4 1 2 ...

Page 336: ...PON 3 While holding the grips 3 lift the developing assembly cleaning unit 4 about 5 cm then shift it to the rear to remove Figure 4 909A Points to Note after Removing the Developing Assembly Cleaner Unit Be sure to spread paper under it to prevent soiling with toner Do not move a unit over units of different colors 3 4 ...

Page 337: ...veloping assemblies and install the protection sheet 1 to each photosensitive drum Figure 4 910A 2 Set the developing assembly 2 in the process unit Do not touch the drum contact face Dry wipe it with lint free paper before use Figure 4 911A 1 1 M C Bk photosensitive drum Check to see that the edge of white paper is bent down Plastic film Y photosensitive drum 2 ...

Page 338: ...drum 7 Slide out the transfer unit and remove the drum protection sheet 5 in the direction of the arrow Store away the drum protection sheet for future use When setting the process unit in the copier make sure that the bosses inside the photosensitive drum flange and the grooves in the drum shaft are matched Take care not to force the process unit to avoid scratching the surface of the drum Points...

Page 339: ...eveloping assembly cleaning unit from the copier See chapter 4 IX PROCESS UNIT SYSTEM A 2 Removing the Developing Assembly Cleaning Unit 2 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the cleaning blade 2 together with its support plate Figure 4 903B 3 When Replacing the Cleaning Blade The cleaning blade comes coated with lubricant However be sure to perform the following to ensure an even coating of lubric...

Page 340: ...y over the edge to avoid damage For the edge apply it in three strokes in the direction of the arrow same direction 4 Removing the Cleaner Side Seal 1 Remove the developing assembly cleaning unit from the copier See chapter 4 IX PROCESS UNIT SYSTEM A 2 Removing the Developing Assembly Cleaning Unit 2 Remove the screw 1 and remove the cleaner side seal 2 Figure 4 905B Figure 4 906B Points to Note W...

Page 341: ...g assembly cleaning unit from the copier See chapter 4 IX PROCESS UNIT SYSTEM A 2 Removing the Developing Assembly Cleaning Unit 2 Separate the developing assembly and the cleaning unit 3 Remove the three screws 1 and remove the cleaning assembly scoop up sheet 2 together with its support plate Figure 4 909B C Developing Assembly 1 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Upper Cover You may clean the dev...

Page 342: ...otential sensor from adverse effects Be sure not to touch the surface of the cover after cleaning 6 Holding the developing assembly upper cover on its edges install the developing assembly 2 Replacing the Color Toner Density Sensor 1 Slide out the process unit from the machine 2 Remove the developing assembly 3 Remove the four screws and remove the developing assembly upper cover 4 Remove the four...

Page 343: ...t the connector and install the developing assembly upper cover Points to Note When Adjusting the S B Gap Be sure to use the S B gap adjusting jig outside the image area of the developing sleeve Be sure to make adjustments only after cleaning the toner off the developing sleeve with lint free paper After making S B gap adjustments check to make sure that the go side of the adjustment jig can slide...

Page 344: ...drum 1 lift it to remove Figure 4 901D 2 Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum If the surface of the photosensitive drum is soiled clean it with a cloth coated with toner Do not use paper lint free or otherwise When removing the photosensitive drum take extra care not to damage it 3 Points to Note When Installing the Photosensitive Drum Make sure that the two bosses 1 on the inside of the flange shaft ...

Page 345: ... the SALT sensor unit take care not to touch its stainless steel area 4 where black plastic film is attached fail ure to do so could damage the shutter assembly Figure 4 902E If you have replaced the SALT sensor be sure to replace the developing agent of the corre sponding color See the instruc tions on how to replace 3 Dry wipe the No 2 scoop up sheet with lint free paper or clean it with a blowe...

Page 346: ...ssembly is very fragile Do not apply excessive force when cleaning the sensor face Use light tapping motions Figure 4 905E 7 Put the solenoid arm back into its initial position with a finger then close the shutter 8 After installing the SALT sensor execute FUNC INSTALL WINCLR Y M C K in service mode 3 Disassembling and Cleaning the Inside of the SALT Sensor Unit 1 Remove the SALT sensor unit 2 Cle...

Page 347: ...lint free paper Figure 4 908E 6 Clean the SALT sensor inside plastic sheet 7 shutter contact member 8 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Use dry lint free paper for the SALT sensor face 9 Figure 4 909E 7 Install all parts by reversing the steps used to remove them 8 Check to make sure that the shutter moves smoothly F No 2 Scoop Up Sheet 1 Removing the No 2 Scoop Up Sheet 1 Remove the SAL...

Page 348: ...the upper fixing roller unit 10 1 Open the front cover left 2 Remove the screw 1 and remove the fixing assembly knob 2 3 Remove the two screws 3 and remove the fixing assembly lever 4 4 Remove the two screws 5 and remove the fixing assembly front cover 6 5 Open the external delivery unit and the internal delivery unit Do not remove the fizmbly to re move such parts as the fixing roller The CLC1000...

Page 349: ...ng assembly lever 2 screws 3 Remove the two screws and remove the fixing assembly front cover 4 Open the external delivery unit and the internal delivery unit 5 Remove the screw and remove the fixing assembly upper cover 6 Remove the two screws 1 and open the upper fixing roller unit 2 Figure 4 1003A 9 Close the upper fixing roller unit 10 Remove the two screws 12 while holding the grips 13 lift t...

Page 350: ... out the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing assembly knob 1 screw and remove the fixing assembly lever 2 screws 3 Remove the two screws and remove the fixing assembly front cover 4 Pull out the faston rear 1 of the upper fixing heater 5 Pull out the faston 2 front of the upper fixing heater and remove the screw 3 to remove the metal fixing 4 Figure 4 1006A Figure 4 1007A 6 Pull out the upper fixing h...

Page 351: ...over 4 Pull out the faston 1 rear of the lower fixing heater 5 Pull out the faston 2 front of the lower fixing heater and remove the screw 3 to remove the metal fixing 4 Figure 4 1008A Figure 4 1009A 6 Pull out the lower fixing heater to the front 5 Removing the Upper Fixing Roller 1 Open the upper fixing roller unit See chapter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 2 Opening the Upper Fixing Roller Unit 2 Remove t...

Page 352: ...ter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 4 Removing the Lower Fixing Heater 3 Remove the lower fixing roller metal fixing 1 one each from front and rear 4 While shifting the bearing front rear of the lower fixing roller remove the lower fixing roller 3 7 Removing the Fixing Thermistor upper Method 1 1 Open the upper fixing roller unit See chapter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 2 Opening the Upper Fixing Roller Unit 2 Remove ...

Page 353: ...fixing roller unit See chapter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 2 Opening the Upper Fixing Roller Unit 4 Turn the thermistor reciprocating cam 3 so that the thermistor is all the way to the front Figure 4 1014A Figure 4 1015A 6 Remove the two fixing thermistor metal fixings and free the cord from the cord clamp then disconnect the connector and remove the fixing thermistor upper 9 Removing the Fixing Thermisto...

Page 354: ...ixing thermistor lower mount 4 10 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch upper 1 Remove the upper fixing roller See chapter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 2 Opening the Upper Fixing Roller Unit 2 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the fixing thermal switch 2 upper Figure 4 1017A 4 Remove the screw 5 and remove the fixing thermistor lower 6 Figure 4 1018A Figure 4 1019A 3 4 5 6 1 2 ...

Page 355: ...ower Figure 4 1020A 12 Removing the Oil Filter 1 Remove the fixing assembly See chapter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the oil filter 1 Figure 4 1021A 13 Removing the Oil Bottle 1 Remove the fixing assembly See chapter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the screw 1 and remove the fixing assembly positioning plate front 2 3 Remove the screw 3 an...

Page 356: ...g assembly knob 1 screw and remove the fixing assembly lever 2 screws 3 Remove the two screws and remove the fixing assembly front cover 4 Open the external delivery unit and the internal delivery unit 5 Remove the screw 1 and remove the fixing assembly upper cover 2 Figure 4 1001B 6 Remove the two screws 3 and remove the upper fixing web unit 4 Figure 4 1002B 7 Insert the process unit tool 5 into...

Page 357: ...gure 4 1005B Figure 4 1005B C Fixing Lower Cleaning Assembly 1 Removing the Lower Fixing Web Lower Fixing Blade 1 Open the front cover left shift down the fixing lever and slide out the fixing unit 2 Remove the fixing assembly knob 1 screw and remove the fixing lever 2 screws 3 Remove the two screws and remove the fixing assembly front cover 4 Open the external delivery unit and the internal deliv...

Page 358: ...ade 7 Figure 4 1003C 2 Removing the Lower Fixing Blade To remove the lower fixing blade without removing the lower fixing web work as follows 1 Push down the blade mount 1 in the direction of the arrow to release then remove the four screws 2 and remove the lower fixing blade 3 Figure 4 1004C When installing the lower fixing blade 3 to the mount with screws 2 tighten the screws starting with the o...

Page 359: ...ck the blade mount 2 Figure 4 1005C D Fixing Oil Application Unit 1 Removing the Oil Applying Roller Blade Unit 1 Open the upper fixing roller unit See chapter 4 X FIXING SYSTEM A 2 Opening the Upper Fixing Roller Unit 2 Shift the oil applying roller blade unit 1 in the direction of the arrow and lift it Figure 4 1001D When installing the blade to the unit be sure to return the blade unit as shown...

Page 360: ...remove the two bushings one each from front and rear 3 Pay attention to the parallel pin inside 4 Remove the oil applying roller Figure 4 1003D 4 Opening the Oil Applying Roller Assembly When servicing the scoop up roller assembly found at the bottom of the oil applying roller work as follows 1 Open the upper fixing roller unit 2 Remove the screw 1 from the rear of the oil applying roller assembly...

Page 361: ...x screws and remove the DC controller PCB 4 Perform the steps shown for the replacement of the DC controller PCB 2 Removing the AC Driver 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the screw 1 and remove the DC controller assembly 2 Figure 4 1101 2 3 Disconnect all connectors from the AC driver and remove the four PCB supports 3 and the AC driver 4 Figure 4 1102 2 3 Removing the Lamp Regulator 1 Remove the ...

Page 362: ... screws 2 then remove the screw 3 and remove the grounding wire to remove the separation high voltage transformer 4 Figure 4 1101 4 5 Removing the Developing Bias High Voltage Transformer 1 Remove the rear cover 1 2 3 2 Disconnect the four connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then remove the power supply cooling fan unit 3 Figure 4 1101 5 3 Remove the two screws 4 and twelve connectors 5 and ...

Page 363: ...ar cover 1 2 2 Remove the two screws each 1 and remove the grounding wire 2 then remove the primary high voltage transformer 3 Figure 4 1101 6 Figure 4 1102 6 7 Removing the DC Power Supply PCB 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 and remove the four screws 1 to remove the waste toner cover 2 Figure 4 1101 7 2 Disconnect the two connectors 3 Figure 4 1102 7 2 1 1 3 4 3 1 3 1 2 4 3 2 1 1 3 ...

Page 364: ... slide out the DC power supply PCB 4 Figure 4 1103 7 8 Removing the Environment Sensor PCB 1 Remove the multifeeder assembly 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the two PCB supports 2 then remove the environment sensor PCB 3 Figure 4 1101 8 9 Removing the Reader Controller 1 Remove the digital cover 4 2 Remove the four screws 1 and remove the reader controller cover 2 Figure 4 1101 9 3 Disconn...

Page 365: ...hen remove the ECO board 2 Figure 4 1101 10 11 Removing the Analog Processor 1 Remove the two fixing screws 1 and fix the digital unit 2 in place as indicated Figure 4 1101 11 fixing screw position Figure 4 1102 11 fixing position 2 Remove the four screws 3 and remove the reader controller cover 4 Figure 4 1103 11 3 Remove the two screws 6 and remove the cable retainer 5 then disconnect the connec...

Page 366: ... Processor PCB and the Memory PCB 1 Remove the two fixing screws 1 and fix the digital unit 2 in place as indicated Figure 4 1101 12 fixing screw position Figure 4 1102 12 fixing position 2 Remove the two screws 3 and remove the front cover 4 of the digital set Figure 4 1103 12 3 Disconnect the three connectors 5 each and remove the two screws 6 each then slide out the image processor PCB 7 and th...

Page 367: ...igure 4 1101 13 2 Remove the three screws 2 and remove the air duct plate 3 Figure 4 1102 13 3 Disconnect all eleven connectors from the video controller PCB and remove the four mounting screws 4 then remove the video controller PCB 5 Figure 4 1103 13 14 Removing the Polygon Motor Driver 1 Make preparations for parts associated with the laser unit 2 Disconnect the four connectors 1 and remove the ...

Page 368: ... 3 and remove the four PCB supports 4 then remove the potential sensor PCB 5 Figure 4 1103 15 4 Draw out the transfer belt unit and the process unit and place paper 6 on the process unit to protect the photosensitive drum against scratches 5 Remove the screw 7 and remove the potential sensor unit 8 Figure 4 1104 15 When installing the potential sensor unit 8 tighten the screw while butt ing it aga...

Page 369: ... 4 5 Remove the screw 7 and remove the cable support plate 6 Figure 4 1102 16 6 Disconnect the two connectors 8 from the front 7 Remove the unit fixing screw 9 and remove the image position correcting CCD unit 10 Figure 4 1103 16 8 Remove the two screws 12 and remove the rear cable fixing plate 11 9 Disconnect the two connectors 13 from the rear Figure 4 1104 16 After installing the image position...

Page 370: ...er 1 Dry wipe the area shown using lint free paper 18 Cleaning the LED 1 Move the shutter where the LED is visible 2 Dry wipe the LED with lint free paper Take care not to peel the end of the plastic sheet shown in the figure Figure 4 1106 16 2 Move the shutter to the rear Try not to apply excessive force when dry wiping the LED Figure 4 1105 16 ...

Page 371: ...h voltage transformer insulating cover 2 then remove the two screws 3 Figure 4 1101 17 3 Disconnect the five connectors 4 from the transfer high voltage transformer Figure 4 1102 17 4 Slide out the transfer high voltage transformer 5 to the right at this time take care so that the transfer high voltage transformer will not touch the transfer belt Figure 4 1103 17 5 Disconnect the two connectors 6 ...

Page 372: ......

Page 373: ...del 5 5 C Supplying Toner 5 7 D Supplying Starter 5 15 E Preventing Deformation of Externals 5 19 F Mounting the Belt Retaining Members 5 20 G Mounting the Developing Bias Assembly Protection Member 5 21 H 1 Installing the Paper Deck for CLC1000 5 24 H 2 Installing the Paper Deck H1 5 31 H 3 Checking the Operation of the Paper Deck 5 33 I Checking Images and Operations 5 35 III RELOCATING THE MACH...

Page 374: ......

Page 375: ... 230V 650W upper heater 1pcs 2 230V 550W lower heater 1pcs 3 230V deck heater harness 1pcs 4 Label 1pcs Mode Voltage Amperage Receptacle 1North American 208 240 V 15 A NEMA 6 20R 2European 230 V 16A DIN49440 49441 3UK 230 V 13 A BS1363 4Australian 230 V 15 A AS Figure 5 1 5 The floor must be level so that all feet of the machine are in contact with the floor and the machine remains level Figure 5 ...

Page 376: ...ME AU JAPON 6 The machine must be installed at least 10 cm away from all walls so as to allow machine operation and maintenance work Figure 5 3 Make the following spatial considerations for the machine Figure 5 4 50 cm min 50 cm min 50 cm min 10 cm min 2236mm 2633mm 1573mm 1663mm if w sorter if w projector ...

Page 377: ...ed to condensation tend to generate faulty images If the copier has been brought in from a cold place leave it alone at the site of installation for at least one hour before starting the work A Unpacking Step 1 2 3 Work Cut the two bands used to hold the shipping box and free the shipping box Tear off and remove the plastic bag Turn the nuts and remove the metal fixings 2 each at front and rear us...

Page 378: ...and accessories Remarks Check to make sure that none of the following is missing Copy tray Control key 2 pcs Operator s Manual Fixing oil 2 bottles Toner 4 colors Starter 4 colors Oil nozzle Hopper retaining fixing 2 pcs Process unit grip 2 pcs Laser shutter open tool 2 pcs Starter collecting container 4 pcs Drum protection sheet plastic bag Transfer unit fixing tool Storage box When sliding in th...

Page 379: ...screws from the transfer unit Remove the tape and materials used to keep the lever and others in place Remove the tape and fixing materials from inside the cassette Release the lever of the transfer unit slide out the transfer unit and remove the tape used to keep the jam removal tweezers and the tap used to keep the transfer belt at the rear Thereafter set the transfer unit in place Remarks The s...

Page 380: ...5 6 COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Step 8 Work Remove the cap from the fixing oil tank and pour two bottles of fixing oil Then close the cap Remarks ...

Page 381: ... of the Y toner bottle toward the front and lightly tap on the bottom and the side of the bottle two to three times Take note of the time at which toner supply operation starts Check to make sure that the toner has poured into the hopper Close the slide shutter of the Y toner bottle and turn the bottle counterclockwise about 10 to remove Check to make sure no toner remains on the mesh over the inl...

Page 382: ...embly to the front and then lift it It will be locked when lifted to the topmost position Shift down the lever of the transfer unit and release the transfer belt from the photosensitive drum Slide out the transfer unit and remove the transfer unit cover 2 mounting screws Put the transfer unit back into its original position Keep the releasing lever released Remarks Do not dispose of the toner bott...

Page 383: ...ssemblies Remove the four photosensitive drum positioning knobs The knobs have a two layer construction To remove turn the small knob at the center counterclockwise Remove the two screws from the process unit Remarks Primary charging assembly Positioning knob Screw Process unit Screw After removal place each primary charging assembly so that its grid side faces up ...

Page 384: ...come with the machine Slide out the process unit Remove the mounting screw and remove the four photosensitive drum cleaner locking rolls Store away the screw and locking rolls Remarks Push the center of the blade indicated by an arrow with a finger to release the pres sure on the roll Do not remove the protection sheet from the drum Grip Process unit Locking roll Mounting screw ...

Page 385: ...he transfer unit cover and put the transfer unit back into position then set lock the lever of the transfer unit Release the lock to the lower left of the hopper then bring down the hopper assembly to the bottom to set it in position Insert the cover switch actuator into the cover switch assembly Check the power supply and connect the power plug Turn on the power switch insert the control key and ...

Page 386: ... the cassette size plate from each cassette and attach the appropriate size label then put the cassettes back into their original positions Install the original tray Lift the hopper assembly as far up as it goes M S R P F FUNC DISP ADJUST COUNTER OPTION TEST AUTO REG 0 LSNS KIL 0 INSTALL 2 4 REG APER If you are installing a paper deck you must remove the rear right cover Be sure to install the pap...

Page 387: ...NSTALLATION Step 30 31 32 Remarks Work Install the hopper retaining fixing that comes with the machine right Install the hopper retaining fixing that comes with the machine left Release the lock of the hopper assembly and lower the hopper assembly as far down as the metal fixing Hopper retaining fixing ...

Page 388: ... Install the two laser shutter opening tools to the two laser shutters Lift the hopper assembly as far up as it moves and manually engage the lock found in the lower left of the hopper assembly Work as instructed under D Supplying Starter Laser shutters 2 pcs Laser shutter Shutter push on member Groove Laser shutter push on member Laser shutter ...

Page 389: ...to avoid leakage When done press the Stop key to stop the operation of the developing assembly Repeat steps 1 through 3 for M C and Bk Press SPLY M SPLY C or SPLY K as necessary to suit each color After supplying all developing assemblies with starters check to make sure that 10 min or more has passed since the end of toner supply to the hopper D Supplying Starter M S R P F FUNC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 390: ...fixings and check to make sure that the lock is released then set the hopper assembly into place Thereafter fix it in place with two fixing screws Press STIR 4 Wait until stirring ends about 1 min Press INIT 7 Sheet M S R P F FUNC DISP ADJUST COUNTER OPTION TEST INIT Y SINIT Y STIR Y SPLY Y INIT M SINIT M STIR M SPLY M INIT C SINIT C STIR C SPLY C INIT 3 SINIT K STIR K INIT 7 SINIT 4 STIR 4 SPLY K...

Page 391: ...C SGNL S K SGNL D Y SGNL D M SGNL D C SGNL D K SIGG D Y SIGG D M SIGG D C SIGG D K PT OFST K REF S Y REF S M REF S C REF S K 4 4 INSTALL The initial ATR related readings will be indicated on the 3rd 4th screen under INSTALL Record the readings on the service data sheet Press the key to scan through the screens The service data sheet is attached behind the document compartment of the front cover le...

Page 392: ... 19 20 Remarks Work Turn off and then on the power switch and wait until warm up ends Select ADJSUT PASCAL in service mode then set PASCAL to 1 Press the Reset key twice to end service mode Execute auto gradation correction in user mode Pick up must be from an A3 or B4 cassette otherwise feed A3 B4 paper using the multifeeder ...

Page 393: ... right front cover and front lower cover Remove the harness base cassette lower secured to the base plate with three screws Attach the harness base temporarily to the cassette holder by means of duct tape or the like Detach the rear cover 1 2 3 cover E Preventing Deformation of Externals Waste toner cover Lower cassette Upper cassette Front lower cover Right front cover Screws Screw Tape Cable mou...

Page 394: ...r of the machine so that the 6 mm dia hole of the belt retaining member and its corresponding 4 mm dia hole in the bottom plate match Using the M4x8 screws used to keep the externals secure the belt retaining member to the base plate Be sure to tighten the screws while butting the belt retaining member upward and toward the center of the machine Likewise mount the belt retaining member to the righ...

Page 395: ...e M4x8mm screw removed in step1 as shown Using the M4x8mm screw used to hold the rear cover secure the developing bias assembly protection member to the rear of the base plate Lead the belt through the gap of the belt retaining member Before suspending the machine apply light tension and check to make sure that the belt is in contact with the top surface of the retaining member at four points G Mo...

Page 396: ...er The left cover will warp when tension is imposed on the belt but it will recover as soon as the belt is detached On the right side secure the harness base removed previously by means of duct tape and put the belt directly on the base plate At the right rear put the belt over the developing bias assembly protection member mounted previously At the left rear put the belt directly on the base plat...

Page 397: ...Work Be sure to use soft cloth or cushioning material to prevent damage where the belt comes into contact with the machine Be sure to attach a horizontal belt as shown to keep the machine level and also to prevent the machine from slipping Secure where two belts cross Horizontal belt to prevent slippage Suspension vertical belt ...

Page 398: ... copier s rear right cover 3 mounting screws and the front right cover 2 mounting screws If the control key is inserted remove it in advance Remove the connector cover H 1 Installing the Paper Deck for CLC1000 If the paper deck does not come as standard follow the instructions in the Installation Procedure that comes with the Paper Deck Installation Kit Screws Screws Pick up assembly cover Screws ...

Page 399: ... non 200V model skip this step Install the pick up assembly cover new 6 mounting screws At this time move the cable to A For a non 200V model skip this step Remove the rear right small cover from the rear right cover 2 mounting screws For a non 200V model skip this step Screws Lower right cover Pick up assembly cover new Screws Screws Cable A Rear right cover Rear right small cover Screws ...

Page 400: ...n 200V model skip this step Open the cardboard box of the paper deck and remove the fixing members and the fixing tape Place the paper deck on its side and turn the paper deck adjuster 1 each at front and rear so that the distance d is about 85 mm Remove the metal fixing 2 mounting screws Harness cover Screws 85mm d Screws Metal fixing As many as five fixing screws for the paper deck are included ...

Page 401: ...e five screws from the copier The screws will not be used Match the cut off in the paper deck lower frame and the guide pin of the copier then install the paper deck to the copier using five screws Be sure to use the screws that come with the copier Install the metal fixing where indicated 2 mounting screws Screw to remove Screw Metal fixing Screws ...

Page 402: ...t the paper deck assembly to the copier and check to make sure that the gap between the copier s front right cover and the front cover of the paper deck are parallel i e the difference between the gap top and the gap bottom is 1 mm or less Make the same check for the copier s rear right cover and the rear cover of the paper deck If the gap is not as specified adjust the adjuster Check to make sure...

Page 403: ...CK SET Press DECK P to select the size of the paper used by the user Remove the four screws and disconnect the connector then remove the paper deck heater M S R P F DISP FUNC COUNTER OPTION TEST ADJUST DECK SET 0 DECK P A4 DECK READY READY ADJUST DECK page 1 Start service mode and select OPTION DECK Connector Screws Paper deck heater If a diffferent paper size is desired perform the following ...

Page 404: ...right size guide plate while holding it horizontally Remove the right size guide plate by lifting it to the left at an angle Tilt the left size guide plate to the right Pull out the bush lock used to fix the side guide plate rear front in place and move the side guide plate Install the paper deck heater Right size guide plate Right size guide plate Bush pins ...

Page 405: ...move the attachment from the front and the rear of the deck lifter assembly Remove the four screws and disconnect the connector then heater Remove the four screws used to secure the side guide plates rear front in place then shift the side guide plate Attachment Connector Screws Paper deck heater Screws If a diffferent paper size is desired perform the following At time of shipment from the factor...

Page 406: ...screw used to secure the side guide plate right rear then shift the side guide plate right rear to suit the new paper size To switch to A3 extra length 12x18 Open the paper deck cover Remove the attachment from the front and the rear of the deck lifter assembly A Screw Size guide plate right rear Attachment Do not loosen the screw A indicated in the figure ...

Page 407: ...er ADJUST While the FEED ADJ screen is indicated press the Start key Check the left right registration then adjust the image write start position in main scanning direction and the image write start position in sub scanning direction using VSYC ADJ Thereafter adjust the no image width using MARGN L R T B Check to make sure that the left right registration is normal when copies are made using paper...

Page 408: ...plate Loosen the three adjusting screws each to adjust the upper mounting plate rear front of the side guide plate as specified If the displacement is appreciable loosen the three adjusting screws each of the lower mounting plate rear front of the side guide plate to make adjustments After adjusting the left right registration mount the side guide plate and the deck heater Take care not to change ...

Page 409: ...r and close the front covers Set the cassette size to suit the needs of the user First set the side guide plate to suit the paper size Then put paper in the cassette and adjust the trailing edge guide plate against the trailing edge of the paper Remove the cassette size plate from each cassette and attach the appropriate size label Install the cassettes back into their original positions Set the C...

Page 410: ... unit and slide out the fixing unit Open the external delivery unit and the internal delivery unit remove the fixing assembly lever 2 screws fixing assembly knob 1 screw and fixing assembly front cover 2 screws then remove the fixing assembly front cover Loosen the two screws and open the fixing assembly Remove the two screws and open the fixing assembly Remove the screw from the rear of the upper...

Page 411: ...nitial position Remove the paper deck Screw Screw Fixing assembly Screw Screw Fixing assembly rear Fixing assembly mount front Oil receptacle Screw Oil tank At this time take care not to drop the hose attached to the oil receptacle Be sure to fit the two screws removed in step 6 in ad vance of this step If the route of relocation is not flat and the copier is likely to be subjected to vibration fo...

Page 412: ... original tray over the stepped screws then fix the tray in position with two screws IV INSTALLING THE ORIGINAL TRAY Installing on the Right Screws Stepped screws Original tray Step 1 2 Remarks Work Peel the four face stickers from the copier s right side and fit the two stepped screws Fit the original tray over the stepped screws then fix the tray in position with two screws Installing on the Lef...

Page 413: ...assembly right cover Remove the screw and remove the hopper assembly left cover Remove the two fixing screws from the hopper assembly Holding the right and left grips pull out the hopper assembly to the front Remove the copier s left side plate and remove the three screws used to fix the control panel in place V INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V Left cover Screw Right cover Screw Fixing screws Hopper ...

Page 414: ... behind the control panel then turn over the control panel Remove the 13 screws and remove the control panel back cover Remove the mounting screw from the face plate then disengage the claw to remove the face plate from the card slot Install the insulating sheet over the display window for the control card on the control panel Peel the protection sheet from the control card Wire saddles Control ca...

Page 415: ... the control card where the card slides in and out easily Further check that the printer connector is centered over the hole Fix the grounding wire of the control card to the control panel Disconnect the short connector for the control card behind the control panel then connect the connector 4P of the control card Screw Screw Screws Control Card V Screw Grounding wire Control panel back cover Shor...

Page 416: ...ntrol panel with 13 screws then connect the control relay connector to the control panel Fix the control panel relay harness and the relay harness for the control panel in place with the wire saddles on the control panel back cover then install the control panel by reversing the steps used to remove it Return the hopper assembly back to its original position and fix it in place then install the le...

Page 417: ...PAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING I PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS 6 2 II CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES 6 5 A By the Copier s Hard Counter 6 5 B By the Soft Counter in Service Mode COUNTER 6 7 III SCHEDULED SERVICING PROCEDURE 6 8 IV SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHART 6 9 ...

Page 418: ......

Page 420: ...elivery assembly exhaust fan Or 1 yr FM17 18 power supply assembly exhaust fan PUFM1 2 power supply assembly cooling fan Or 1 yr FM4 5 6 16 17 18 PUFM1 2 Or 1 yr FM14 15 digital unit cooling fan Or 1 yr FM8 9 primary charging assembly suction fan Or 1 yr FM19 20 delivery assembly lower cooling fan Or 1 yr FM1 2 3 delivery assembly exhaust fan Or 1 yr FM6 primary exhaust fan I PERIODICALLY REPLACED...

Page 421: ...COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 6 3 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 5 4 4 4 8 4 2 7 6 3 4 1 3 Dust proofing filter Ozone filter Toner filter 9 4 ...

Page 422: ...s name FF5 4191 000 FB2 2958 000 FY3 0030 000 FY3 0040 000 FF2 3551 000 FF2 3552 000 FY3 0030 000 FY3 0040 000 FF5 5517 000 FA5 1876 000 FB2 2887 000 FB2 2901 000 FB2 2924 000 FF5 4166 000 FF5 4167 000 FF5 4164 000 FF5 4165 000 FF5 4188 000 Q ty 4 4 AR AR 4 4 AR AR 2 AR 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 Life 100 000 90 000 25 000 22 000 25 000 22 000 25 000 22 000 25 000 22 000 25 000 22 000 100 000 90 000 100 000 ...

Page 423: ...o be purchased by the user To be purchased by the user To be purchased by the user 200 V 230 V 200 V 230 V II CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES A By the Copier s Hard Counter As of March 2001 Parts name FG5 3918 000 F42 0536 F42 0526 F42 0516 F 42 0506 FB4 6597 000 FB4 6598 000 FB3 3228 000 FB2 3201 000 FB2 3090 000 FB2 2887 000 FB3 9463 000 FB3 7088 000 FB3 9466 000 FB2 1143 000 FB2 4114 000 FG5 8277 000 ...

Page 424: ... Primary charging assembly Developing assembly Y M C Developing assembly Bk Remarks Parts name FB3 2047 000 FB3 3215 000 FB3 4065 000 FG5 4089 020 FG5 8611 000 FG5 8612 000 Q ty 1 4 1 4 3 1 Life 200 000 180 000 200 000 200 000 250 000 230 000 250 000 230 000 250 000 230 000 The above values are estimates only and are subject to change based on future data The parts numbers are subject to change to...

Page 425: ...multifeeder Feeding roller multifeeder Separation roller multifeeder Scanning lamp Remarks B By the Soft Counter in Service Mode COUNTER As of March 2001 Parts name FF5 2102 000 FF5 2101 000 FF5 2103 000 FF5 2104 000 FF5 2102 000 FF5 2101 000 FF 5743 000 FF5 1221 000 FF5 1220 000 FB1 7061 000 FB1 7060 020 FF2 5674 020 FF2 4785 020 FF2 6312 020 FF5 4327 000 FF5 4331 000 FF2 4710 000 FH7 3298 000 Q ...

Page 426: ...Make test copies Make sample copies Arrange the sample copies and clean up the area around the machine Record the latest counter reading Fill out the Service Sheet and report to the person in charge Execute automatic gradation correction control in user mode Remarks Standard 2 5 1 5 mm Direct Standard 2 0 1 0 mm Direct Exercise care when sliding out the waste toner box Excess impact can cause the ...

Page 427: ...ing glass Scanner mirror Nos 1 through 3 Reflecting shade Standard white plate Primary pre primary charging wire grid Primary charging wire cleaning pad upper lower Primary pre charging assembly Separation pre fixing charging assembly Scoop up sheet No 2 scoop up sheet SALT sensor Cleaner side seal Cleaner end seal Cleaning blade Remarks Or 1 yr Or 1 yr Or 1 yr When replacing the lamp When replaci...

Page 428: ...lt back cleaning material Inlet guide plate Delivery separation claw Thermistor upper Thermistor lower Oil applying blade Oil removing blade Upper cleaning belt spring clutch Remarks When replacing the belt When replacing the belt When replacing the belt When replacing the belt 1 Belt back surface cleaning member When replacing the upper lower fixing roller When replacing the upper lower fixing ro...

Page 429: ...pper cover Pick up roller Feeding roller Separation roller Pre fixing feeding top face belt Transfer separation guide Registration roller releasing spring clutch Remarks When replacing the drum Every 500 000 copies 1 Registration roller replacing spring clutch 2 Multifeeder assembly Maintenance every 25 000 every 50 000 every 100 000 others 1 2 For instructions on cleaning see Chapter 4 Mechanical...

Page 430: ...ower plastic sheet Pre holding tray feeding assembly Duplexing unit inside SALT sensor plastic sheet Transfer unit cover transfer belt plastic sheet front Remarks Collect every 50 000 copies At time of replacing drum developer At time of replacing drum developer At time of replacing drum developer 1 Holding tray pre feeding assembly 1 SALT sensor plastic sheet 2 SALT sensor 1 Transfer belt plastic...

Page 431: ...ING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS GUIDE TO TABLES 7 1 I MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 7 3 II STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 7 7 III TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE PROBLEMS 7 52 IV TROUBLESHOOTING 7 88 V TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS 7 140 VI ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTION OF ELECTRICAL PARTS 7 149 VII SERVICE MODE 7 187 VIII SELF DIAGNOSIS 7 296 ...

Page 432: ...he Transfer Belt Motor 7 24 4 Adjusting the Position of the Transfer Belt Related Solenoid 7 24 G When Replacing the Pick Up Feeding Related Parts 7 25 1 Registering the Cassette Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Setting under FUNC 7 25 2 Orientation of the Pick Up Roller cassette pick up assembly duplexing unit pick up assembly 7 27 3 Orientation of the Separation Roller cassette pick up assembly dup...

Page 433: ...ointerrupters 7 47 5 Using a Meter 7 47 6 Using Service Mode 7 47 III TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE PROBLEMS 7 52 A Initial Checks 7 52 1 Checking the Site of Installation 7 52 2 Checking the Originals 7 52 3 Checking the Copyboard Cover Copyboard Glass and Standard White Plate 7 52 4 Checking the Charging Assemblies 7 52 5 Checking the Developing Assembly 7 52 6 Checking the Paper 7 52 7 Checking the Per...

Page 434: ...g lamp fails to turn ON 7 127 39 The lifter fails to move up pick up from the cassette 7 128 40 Pick up fails cassette 1 7 129 41 Pick up fails cassette 2 7 130 42 The multifeeder fails to pick up paper 7 131 43 The registration roller fails to rotate 7 131 44 Retention fails 7 132 45 The pre exposure lamp fails to turn ON 7 133 46 The fixing heater fails to turn ON 7 134 47 The drum heater fails ...

Page 435: ...sition adjustment 7 226 2 DOC REC original detection area slice level 7 228 3 PROJ projector area adjustment 7 229 4 ED RDF editor RDF adjustment 7 231 5 V CONT photosensitive drum surface potential contrast adjustment 7 234 6 COL ADJ user color balance adjustment correction 7 235 7 PASCAL auto gradation correction control 7 236 8 ADJ MISC 7 238 9 FEED ADJ image position adjustment 7 240 10 ENV SE...

Page 436: ...kness sensor adjustment 7 283 17 IMG REG image position correction control 7 284 E OPTION options mode 7 286 1 R OPT reader related machine settings 7 287 2 P OPT cleaning mode 7 289 3 REMOTE machine settings with IPU in use 7 290 4 DECK settings for the Paper Deck 7 291 5 DATA CON disconnecting the Copy Data Controller A1 7 291 F TEST PRINT test print 7 292 G COUNTER counter 7 294 VIII SELF DIAGN...

Page 437: ...he power plug connected to the power outlet Connect the power plug YES NO 2 Are the front cover right left and delivery cover closed properly Close the cover YES NO 3 Is the rated voltage present at the power outlet The problem is not of the copier Advise the customer as such Step Action Yes No Checks n Checks on the voltage using a meter call for special note the description Check the voltage bet...

Page 438: ......

Page 439: ...ckwise Generate Test Print TYPE 4 Execute INSTALL STIR Y M C K for the problem color YES Check to see if the grid plate is mounted properly 1 Check the mounting position of the copyboard glass standard white plate scanning lamp reflecting shade and No 1 2 3 mirror If dirt is found clean the part 2 Check to see if the No 1 mirror mount or the No 2 mirror mount should have ridden over the rail 3 Che...

Page 440: ... 380 900 380 900 300 720 Is a similar density fault noted for all colors Check the HVT 3B PCB YES NO Is the fault noted for Y and M only Check the HVT 3AR PCB YES NO Check the HVT 3AL PCB Check the transfer blade Check the transfer belt Check the environment sensor NO Check HVT 1 YES START Check the latent static image formation system Is the test print considerably light YES NO NO NO Check the dr...

Page 441: ...et guide plate Transfer blade Waste toner box Alcohol Lint free paper Lint free paper Cotton swab Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Collecting the box Solvent Parts Tools solvents Work remarks Primary pre primary charging assembly Cleaner side seal Cleaner end seal Scoop up sheet No 2 scoop up sheet SALT sensor Shutter Alcohol Lint free paper Cleaning Cleaning Note 3 Parts Tools solvents Work remarks Dus...

Page 442: ......

Page 443: ...alue in parentheses refers to the second side of a two sided copy 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 5 1 5mm Figure 7 201 Leading Edge Non Image Width 0 2 4 6 8 10 2 0 1 0mm Figure 7 202 Left Right Non Image Width 2 Image Margin The image margin on copies made in Direct with original detection OFF must be as follows Leading edge 2 5 1 5 mm 2 5 2 0 mm Left right 2 0 1 0 mm 2 0 1 5 mm The value in parent...

Page 444: ...3 Select FUNC ATTRACT 4 Using ATT SLCT select the pick up assem bly which is outside the specification 5 Press ATT ON Paper will be picked up automatically and stopped retained on the transfer belt 6 Make adjustments so that the distance L be tween the front edge of paper 1 and the front side plate 3 of the transfer unit 2 is 74 7 0 5 mm reference In the case of LTR 83 7 0 5 mm L 1 2 3 Figure 7 20...

Page 445: ...attained 1 Figure 7 207 Two Sided Copies Loosen the screw 1 and adjust the position of the paper guide plate so that the standard value is attained 1 Figure 7 208 Pick Up from the Paper Deck 1 Remove the four screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then remove the paper deck heater 3 1 2 3 Figure 7 209 2 Pull out the push locks 4 used to fix the side guide plates front rear in place and remove th...

Page 446: ...CTIONS 3 Loosen the three adjusting screws 5 each and adjust the upper mounting plates rear front of the side guide plate 5 5 Figure 7 211 Take care not to change the paper width 4 If the discrepancy is excessive loosen the three adjusting screws 6 each and ad just the lower mounting plates rear front on the side guide plate 6 6 Figure 7 212 ...

Page 447: ...J FEED ADJ S MARGN R xxx xxx MULT ADJ MARGN T xxx xxx DECK ADJ MARGN B Figure 7 213 1 Start service mode and select ADJUST FEED ADJ 2 While the FEED ADJ screen is on press the Start key 3 If the image margin is not as indicated adjust the image writing start position in the main scanning direction using UP ADJ LOW ADJ MULT ADJ DECK ADJ and REFE ADJ and using VSYC ADJ in the sub scan ning direction...

Page 448: ... portion of the image is missing decrease the setting of ADJ X and ADJ Y 4 If an area outside the image area is copied in crease the setting of ADJ X and ADJ Y 5 Press the Start key once again and check the output 6 Press the Reset key ADJ X ADJ Y 20 20 Figure 7 215 d Adjusting the Pick Up Timing paper deck If a discrepancy is found in the image leading edge margin on LTR copies made using the pap...

Page 449: ...oning tool FY9 3002 000 near at hand before routing the scanner cable 1 Remove the upper rear left cover and the reader unit rear cover 2 Remove the control panel 3 Remove the vertical size plate and the glass retainer right and remove the copyboard glass 4 Move the No 2 mirror mount until the pulley shaft 1 of the No 2 mirror mount is visible through the long hole 2 in the side plate 1 2 Figure 7...

Page 450: ...ed in Figure 7 219 5 8 6 4 2 1 3 Fix temporarily Put the steel ball into the hole Figure 7 219 7 Remove the screw 3 used in step 5 8 Loosen the screw on the mirror positioning tool FY9 3002 000 and extend the arm 6 fully 6 Figure 7 220 9 Set the mirror positioning tool 7 between the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 mirror mount then insert the pin 8 that comes with the mir ror positioning tool 7 8 F...

Page 451: ...o the No 1 mirror mount through the angular hole in the side plate 9 10 Figure 7 223 9 10 Figure 7 224 11 Remove the mirror positioning tool REF You need not adjust the cable ten sion 1 Check to make sure that the scan ner cable is not twisted or has not ridden over the pulley 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 mirror mount by hand to make sure that they move smoothly at this time take care...

Page 452: ... to damage it 1 Figure 7 225 2 Points to Note When Installing the Photosensitive Drum Make sure that the direction of the two bosses 1 on the flange shaft of the photo sensitive drum and the direction of the slits 2 in the drum shaft match When rotating the photosensitive drum be sure to hold up the develop ing assembly so that it is away from the drum to prevent damage Match the slit and the boss...

Page 453: ... 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 3 Points to Note When Fitting the Drum Drive Belt Fit the drum drive belt 2 so that all the mark ings 1 on the drum drive pulleys face the same direction 1 2 Figure 7 228 ...

Page 454: ...re for the primary charging assem bly however cannot be adjusted A full turn of the screw changes the po sition of the charging wire by about 0 7 mm Table 7 201 2 Points to Note When Handling the Primary Grid Plate and the Primary Charging Wire Do not clean the primary grid plate or the pri mary charging wire If image faults uneven den sity occurs replace the part Charging assembly Primary chargin...

Page 455: ...osi tion At this time the locking mechanism will turn on automatically Make a visual check of the hopper assembly to make sure that the hopper assembly is locked 8 Install the hopper retaining fixings left right 9 Release the hopper assembly and move the assembly down to where the retaining fixings are located Hopper assembly Hopper retaining fixing Lock Figure 7 229 10 Install the laser shutter o...

Page 456: ... INSTALL in service mode 16 To collect all four developers press RECV 4 for each press RECV Y M C K The developer will be discharged into the col lecting container the operation will finish in about 2 min 17 When done close the collecting container shutter and fit and tighten the screw 18 Remove the collecting container 19 Close the transfer unit 20 Press SPLY Y M C K as appropriate for the color ...

Page 457: ...xecute STIR 4 about 1 min 33 Execute INIT 7 about 2 min 34 Execute WINCLR 4 35 Record the results on the service label 36 Execute ADJUST PASCAL PASCAL to select 1 37 Turn off and on the power switch 38 Execute auto gradation correction in user mode n Replacement for Y M C 32 Execute STIR Y M C as necessary about 1 min 33 Execute INIT Y M C as necessary about 1 min 34 Execute SINIT Y M C as necessa...

Page 458: ...and turn on the power switch 7 Execute auto gradation correction in user mode 4 When Supplying the Hopper with Toner Perform the following steps when supplying a new hopper or the existing hopper with little toner after replacing the toner level sensor for example with toner so as to prevent leakage of toner from the hopper 1 Install the hopper position metal fixings left right to the copier 2 Fix...

Page 459: ...er service mode After executing 075 RLS turn off and then on the power switch F Transfer Belt Unit 1 Points to Note When Replacing the Transfer Belt The transfer belt has its own orientation When installing it make sure that the side with the seam detecting sticker over the transfer belt assembly is toward the rear Avoid touching the surface of the transfer belt particularly the area coming into c...

Page 460: ... Solenoid SL6 Fix the solenoid in place by butting the pin 1 of the slider against the angular hole end A of the so lenoid mount while the plunger of the solenoid is pulled A 1 Figure 7 239 b Adjusting the Position of the Transfer Blade Solenoid SL7 Fix the solenoid in place so that the distance between the solenoid arm and the solenoid mount base is 17 8 0 3 mm when the plunger of the sole noid i...

Page 461: ...vice mode on the control panel 4 Select the size of the cassette for which you want to register the basic setting UP A4R cassette 1 LOW A4R cassette 2 5 Note that basic setting 1 has been registered 6 Slide out the cassette you want to register the setting for and set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette to STMTR 7 Set the cassette in the copier 8 Check that the basic setting is indicat...

Page 462: ...he paper guide plate of the multifeeder to A4 297 mm 10 The basic setting is indicated on the CST AD screen under FUNC in service mode on the control panel 11 Select the size for which you want to register the basic setting MF A4 12 Note that basic setting 3 has been registered If you have registered basic settings record the settings on the service la bel If you have replaced the DC controller PC...

Page 463: ...ick up assembly green Front Figure 7 244 3 Orientation of the Separation Roller cassette pick up as sembly duplexing unit pick up assembly When installing the separation roller 1 to the pick up assembly make sure that the D cut in the collar is to the front 1 Front Cassette pick up assembly gray Duplexing unit pick up assembly green Figure 7 245 4 Orientation of the Feeding Roller cassette pick up...

Page 464: ...on of the Paper Deck Pick Up Feeding Roller When installing the pick up feeding roller make sure that the marking is to the rear Markings Bearing one way Rear Figure 7 248 7 Orientation of the Paper Deck Separation Roller 1 When installing the separation rubber roller make sure that the marking is to the rear cou pling side Markings Coupling Figure 7 249 2 When installing the separation roller mak...

Page 465: ...er deck lifter Mounting plate 4 0 1mm Adjusting screw Paper surface keep one sheet on the paper deck lifter Pick up roller releasing solenoid Pick up roller Figure 7 251 9 Adjusting the Pressure of the Paper Deck Separation Feed ing Roller If pick up faults or double feeding occurs in the paper deck change the position of the spring hooked on the retard stay a If pick up faults occur increase the ...

Page 466: ...unit pick up assembly If double feeding or pick up faults occur during pick up operation change the position of the pres sure spring of the separation roller a If double feeding occurs move the spring in the direction of A decrease the pressure b If pick up faults occur move the position of the spring in the direction of B increase the pres sure 1 4 A B 2 3 1 Feeding roller 3 Locking lever 2 Separ...

Page 467: ... of B increace the pressure A B 2 1 Figure 7 256 14 Adjusting the Position of the Multifeeder Pick Up Roller Releasing Solenoid SL5 Install the solenoid so that the distance be tween the solenoid arm 2 and the rear side plate 3 is 3 5 0 2 mm when the plunger of the solenoid 1 is pushed in 3 5 0 2mm 1 3 2 Figure 7 257 rear 15 Adjusting the Position of the Duplexing Unit Pick Up Roller Releasing Sol...

Page 468: ...ger of the solenoid 1 pushed in 1 2 3 Figure 7 259 rear 17 Adjusting the Position of the Duplexing Unit Paper Deflect ing Plate Solenoid SL11 1 Remove the duplexing unit 2 Fix the solenoid in place with a mounting screw 3 after moving the solenoid to the delivery di rection while the plunger 2 of the solenoid 1 is pushed in 1 3 2 Figure 7 260 rear 18 Adjusting the Position of the Duplexing Unit St...

Page 469: ... R L 217 0 3 mm L 1 1 Figure 7 262 4 If the measurement is outside the standards remove the duplexing unit front cover 5 Loosen the screw 2 and turn the adjusting screw 3 then adjust the position of the paper guide plate home position sensor 2 3 Figure 7 263 20 Adjusting the Position of the Duplexing Unit Feeding Roller Solenoid SL13 Let the feeding roller drop to the bottom of the duplexing unit ...

Page 470: ...g 2 3 4 3 5 0 5 m m 2 1 Figure 7 266 23 Adjusting the Position of the Upper Fixing Web Take Up Solenoid SL3 1 Keep the delivery assembly upright 2 Fix the solenoid in place so that the vertical dis tance between the top end of the solenoid shaft 2 and the top end of the solenoid lever 3 is 16 3 0 2 mm when the plunger of the solenoid 1 is pushed 16 3 0 2mm 2 3 1 Figure 7 267 24 When Replacing the ...

Page 471: ...perform the fol lowing 1 Remove the transfer right cover and the front right cover 2 Loosen the two mounting screws 1 on the registration roller unit 1 Figure 7 268 3 Adjust the screw 2 used to position the fixing plate The leading edge of paper will be toward the front in relation to the movement of feeding CW 2 Figure 7 269 ccw cw Screw 2 Registration roller unit Transfer belt Paper Conceptual d...

Page 472: ...lacement execute FUNC INSTALL REG APER in service mode If a BD error E100 occurs check the position of the unit and execute REG APER once again 4 Execute FUNC IMG REG AUTO ADJ in service mode 5 Using FUNC INSTALL in service mode set IMG REG to 1 4 Adjusting the Laser Power You must always adjust the laser power when ever you have replaced the laser unit a Required Tools Laser Power Checker FY9 401...

Page 473: ...r inlet cover M laser power checker inlet cover Y laser power checker inlet cover Bk laser power checker inlet cover Analog processor unit Figure 7 272 4 Set the laser power checker switch to 2 5 Insert the laser power checker with its light re ceiving face oriented as indicated in Figure 7 273 Bk laser unit Y laser unit M laser unit C laser unit Laser power checker Light receiving face Light rece...

Page 474: ...y Figure 7 275 Y M Laser Unit 2 Start service mode and execute 1 2 POWER of LASER under FUNC 3 Turn VR1 counterclockwise so that the reading of the Digital Multimeter is 20 0 0 2 mV Take care not to turn too fast the reading will increase abruptly at a certain point 4 Press the Stop key to stop the laser output 5 Execute POWER of 6 LASER under FUNC 6 Turn VR2 counterclockwise so that the reading o...

Page 475: ... Table 7 202 5 Execute 400 P00 of 6 LASER under FUNC 6 Turn VR3 counterclockwise so that the reading of the Digital Multimeter is the P00 target value 7 Press the Stop key to stop the laser output 8 Execute 400 PFF of 6 LASER under FUNC 9 Turn VR4 counterclockwise so that the reading of the Digital Multimeter is the PFF target value 10 Press the Stop key to stop the laser output 11 Adjust the volu...

Page 476: ...and turn the lens assembly until the distance to the end 4 of the lens assembly is 27 3 0 2 mm i e where the markings match 27 3 0 2mm 4 3 Figure 7 277 2 Perform focusing adjustments by turning the lens assembly once again according to the val ues recorded on the label For instance if the value is 2 8 turn the lens assembly in the positive direction counterclockwise when viewing from the end of th...

Page 477: ...d in Table 7 204 If not turn the adjusting screw to adjust b c a Center of paper A3 Feeding direction Figure 7 280 b and c represent points 10 to 15 mm from the edges Taken when the upper and lower rollers are suf ficiently heated Table 7 204 Measuring the Nip Width If the fixing rollers are cool wait until the standby period is over wait an additional 15 min and make 20 copies before taking measu...

Page 478: ... IMG REG of INSTALL2 under FUNC in service mode from 0 to 1 DC controller 14 Enter new user mode settings and the value of B of service label reader controller 15 Turn off and on the power switch 16 Execute auto gradation correction and set PASCAL under ADJSUT in service mode to 1 b When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 1 Initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB See the appropriate instr...

Page 479: ...osition g When Replacing the Paper Thickness Sensor 1 Check the settings A through E recorded on the label attached to the paper thickness sen sor you are replacing and record them under SNSR RNK on the service label At this time you need not perform step 3 and the subse quent steps if the settings are the same as the settings under FUNC P THICK SNSR RNK of service mode 2 Replace the power thickne...

Page 480: ... a Checking the Environment Measurement PCB 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Remove the multitray covers 1 and 2 3 Remove the environment sensor from the en vironment measurement PCB and insert the environment measurement checking tool TKN 0457 in its place 4 Turn on the power switch 5 Set the meter to the 30 VDC range and check to make sure that the voltage of J1 1 and J1 2 on the environment measur...

Page 481: ... B is 0 20 If the difference is outside the specification re place the environment sensor 11 Press the Reset key and turn off the power switch 12 Remove the environment sensor calibration tool from the environment measurement PCB and insert the environment sensor 13 Install all covers The environment sensor calibration tool TKN 0456 is adjusted with high precision at the factory Keep it in a seale...

Page 482: ...image is better suspect a fault in the en vironment sensor or the environment meas urement PCB 5 Return the setting ADJUST ADJ MISC VONT in service mode to 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Y Auto 390 00 390 00 390 00 370 00 340 00 310 00 295 00 245 00 M Auto 365 00 365 00 365 00 345 00 325 00 295 00 275 00 225 00 C Auto 370 00 370 00 370 00 355 00 335 00 315 00 290 00 225 00 K Auto 420 00 420 00 420 00 410 00 ...

Page 483: ...minals on the DC controller PCB or the deck controller PCB shown on the pages that follow 4 Make checks according to the instructions given 2 Using Service Mode 1 Start service mode 2 Press DISP 3 Press SENSOR 4 Make checks as indicated next page M SENSOR S R READY P READY F DISP ADJUST COUNTER FUNC 800003H 800001H 800005H OPTION 800002H 800004H TEST 800000H xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxx...

Page 484: ...paper is present over the registration paper sensor 0 if absent After the multifeeder has been selected and the Start key has been pressed 1 when the lifter of the multifeeder moves up During standby 1 if the lifter of the multifeeder is down During standby 1 when paper is set in the multifeeder During standby 1 when paper is set in the multifeeder 1 if the arm is over the sensor 0 otherwise 1 if ...

Page 485: ...fer belt edge sensor 2 rear Pick up vertical path 1 sensor Paper deck connection sensor Checks 1 when the transfer belt is moved down under FUNC in service mode 0 when moved up 0 when the transfer belt is moved down under FUNC in service mode 1 when moved up During copying 1 when paper is present over the post registration paper sensor 0 when absent 1 when paper is present over the separation sens...

Page 486: ...standby slide out the cassette 1 1 when the cassette is slid in with paper 0 when the cassette is slid in without paper During standby slide out the cassette 1 1 when the cassette is slid out 0 when the cassette is slid in 1 when paper is present over the pick up vertical path 2 sensor 0 when absent 1 when paper is present over the pick up vertical path 3 sensor 0 when absent During standby 1 when...

Page 487: ...der unit controller J1306A 5 J2211B 8 801002 bit3 J2241 4 804004 bit 6 J2241 7 804004 bit 7 J2223A 7 801005 bit 6 Checks 1 when paper is present in the duplexing reversing assembly 0 when absent 1 when paper is put over the delivery sensor 0 otherwise 1 when paper is put over the internal delivery sensor 0 otherwise During standby 1 when the detecting lever is put over the sensor 0 otherwise Durin...

Page 488: ...ervicing Chart and replace those that reached the end of their lives A Initial Checks 1 Checking the Site of Installation a Make sure that the voltage at the power source is as rated 10 b Make sure that the site is not subject to high temperature humidity near a water faucet water boiler humidifier and is not cold not close to a source of fire and not subject to dust c Make sure that the site is n...

Page 489: ...age Adjustment Basic Procedure first B Standard Image What is referred to as a standard image is an image in which the gray scale color patches and 3 color gradation scale are as follows when the Canon CA 1 Test Sheet is copied in four full colors 1 Gray Scale No 1 dark area is more or less black and the density grows lighter with No 8 light area being barely visible and No 9 being white The color...

Page 490: ...NG IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 6 Fogging The white area must not be foggy Figure 7 301 Gray scale No 1 through No 3 dark area No 4 through No 6 halftone area No 7 through No 9 light area Color patch Halftone band Photo Gradation scale No 1 through No 3 dark area No 4 through No 6 halftone area No 7 through No 9 light area ...

Page 491: ...7 55 COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS Figure 7 302 Standard Image Sample ...

Page 492: ...E 5 Enter the appropriate PG number using the keypad 6 Set the color mode COLOR Y M C K 1 selects a color Effective when PGTYPE 2 3 4 5 or 6 7 Set the density of the test print Set the density using the DENS Y M C K key Effective when PGTYPE 5 8 Press the Start key Be sure to return the setting of PGTYPE to 0 when you have fin ished checks using test prints Table 7 301 Description Image from CCD r...

Page 493: ...rint to check the hues For the 256 color test print the 16x16 frames from the leading edge of the copy paper represent 256 colors all frames that follow are repetitions of the first set a Hues of the 256 Colors The print must show the hues shown in Figure 7 303 If the hues are different suspect deterioration of the developer deterioration of the photosensi tive drum and mixing of developers Figure...

Page 494: ... the 256 gradation test print to check grada tion and balance between colors To select a color use service mode TEST DENS Y M C K a Gradation You may check the gradation of all densities from density 0 to density 255 b Balance between Colors 3 color copying Select 3 color mode and generate a test print to check the gray balance of all densities from den sity 0 to density 255 Figure 7 304 ...

Page 495: ... Y M C K a Gradation If the gradation of density is not as shown in Figure 7 305 suspect a fault in the developing as sembly or the laser system b Fogging If fogging is over the section of 00 activation in Figure 7 305 suspect a fault in the developing sys tem or the photosensitive drum or the laser may not be adjusted correctly c White Lines If white lines are noted on the image suspect a fault i...

Page 496: ...iminating assembly b Black Lines If black lines are noted suspect scratches on the photosensitive drum or dirt on the primary charging wire c White Lines If white lines are noted at the same location for all colors suspect a fault on the transfer belt If they occur at different locations or if they oc cur in one color only suspect a fault in the develop ing assembly d Uneven Intervals If uneven in...

Page 497: ...ted suspect a fault in the transfer belt Color displacement on this test print does not necessarily mean color displacement on regular copies because of black text processing The mechanisms are normal as long as color displace ment is not noted on regular copies Use this test to find out the location of displacement and the color if color displacement is noted on regular cop ies b Right Angles Str...

Page 498: ...100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 7 Image Position Correction Pattern PGTYPE 07 Use this test print to check whether the image position correction pattern is normal or otherwise Figure 7 308 ...

Page 499: ...sity is light for all colors suspect a fault in the up down movement of the transfer belt b White Lines development For instance if white lines are noted in the cyan area of the copied image suspect a fault in the de veloping assembly for cyan c Uneven Density between Left and Right If uneven density occurs between left and right for all colors suspect dirt on the butting block and a fault in the ...

Page 500: ...balance gradation of YMCBk and gra dation of RGB mono and fogging a Gray Balance Check to make sure that each color is repro duced at an even density over the gray scale To make adjustments use the contrast poten tial b Gradation Check gradation of YMCBk and RGB mono and difference in density c Fogging If fogging is noted in the white area suspect a fault in the developing assembly or the photosen...

Page 501: ... color Cont d Cause Moire Scanner Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Checks Clean the primary charging assem bly dust proofing glass reflecting mirror and lens Is the problem corrected Is the output image of the halftone test print PGTYPE 5 normal Is the image uneven because of moire Pattern interference that can occur when copying originals printed in dots Clean the standard white plate scanning lamp and reflectin...

Page 502: ... BLADE under FUNC in service mode to check the locking of the transfer blade At this time is the transfer blade subject to warping or other fault Are there scratches or dents in the peripheral direction of the fixing roller upper lower Is there a fault in the fixing oil apply ing roller oil hose oil tank fixing oil pump drive solenoid SL2 or oil removing blade Yes No NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES Act...

Page 503: ...s the problem corrected Is the transfer blade locking mechanism of the transfer unit normal Are there scratches or a fault on the transfer blade Operate the transfer blade using BLADE under FUNC in service mode to check the locking of the transfer blade At this time is the transfer blade subject to warping or other fault Are there scratches or dents in the peripheral direction of the fixing roller...

Page 504: ...s noted in all colors go to step 13 If the problem is noted in a specific color go to the next step Does the cleaner of the primary charging assembly stop in the middle Clean the primary charging wire and the pre primary charging wire Is the problem corrected Are there scratches or dirt on the grid plate Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum Yes No NO NO YES YE...

Page 505: ...te Is there a collection of waste toner in the cleaning assembly Does the transfer blade have warp ing bending or a fault Check the developing assembly and the developing cylinder for which the problem is noted Is there a fault Does the SALT sensor scoop up sheet have deformation or a fault Yes No YES YES YES YES YES YES Action Remove the foreign matter and clean the cleaning blade and the outside...

Page 506: ... oil supply solenoid or oil removing blade Clean the standard white plate scanning lamp and reflecting lamp cover mirror Is the problem cor rected Remove the CCD cover and clean the surface of the CCD with a blower brush Is the problem corrected Yes No YES NO YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Remove the cause and replace the part Clean the bending mirror and the folding mirror Replace the upper fixing...

Page 507: ...cratches Clean the cleaning blade with lint free pa per You need not replace it if its edge is free of scratches Thereafter put lubricant on lint free paper and coat the edge of the cleaning blade evenly with lubricant Points to Note If the lubricant is not even the copies may carry white vertical lines Limit the application to the edge of the blade i e where it will come into contact with the dru...

Page 508: ... lines are noted Are there white streaks or other fault Clean the dust proofing glass of the laser exposure system Is the prob lem corrected Clean the lens with a blower brush Is the problem corrected Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum Does the problem occur during installation of the machine or re placement of the photosensitive drum Yes No NO YES YES YES Y...

Page 509: ... and cleaning opera tion Check the fixing assembly separa tion claw or the separation guide for an error Are there scratches or dents on the oil removing blade Clean the separation assembly Is the problem corrected Clean the standard white plate scanning lamp reflecting lamp cover mirror reflecting mirror and lens Is the problem corrected Yes No YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Replac...

Page 510: ... will allow the lubricating ingredients to slide over the cleaning blade and adhere to the photosensitive drum causing vertical white lines on the copies If such a problem is noted 1 Using the color for which vertical white streaks are noted make 10 solid copies in continuous mode This step may correct the problem 2 Remove the photosensitive drum and using a cloth coated with the color in question...

Page 511: ...if something has rubbed against the area Is the problem random horizontal line of a specific color Is the problem at intervals of about 30 mm and of all colors Is the problem a black line 188 mm from the leading edge of the image Does the scanning lamp flicker Yes No NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Go to step 8 Replace the photosensi tive drum Generate 20 test prints PG TYPE 05 continu ou...

Page 512: ...mm Drum Random 30 mm approx Cause A transfer memory exists on the drum Traces of contact with the developing cylinder exist on the drum The trailing edge of curled paper touched the separation charging assembly The output of the devel oping bias is faulty Dirt exists on the de curling roller upper Action Generate 20 test prints PG 05 halftone continu ously Try five times or so while checking the i...

Page 513: ...nder Is it normal Is the locking mechanism for the transfer blade normal Does the transfer blade have warp ing bending or a fault Does the transfer belt have scratches bending or a fault Is offset toner noted on the surface of the fixing roller Yes No NO NO NO YES YES YES NO Action Clean the rail of the mirror mount Check the cable of the scanning system Replace the developing assembly Remove the ...

Page 514: ...transfer belt for scratches Check the transfer belt for scratches and deformation Is the problem noted at intervals of about 180 mm Check to find out whether the lump of toner is of waste toner or developer Waste toner gray mixed colors Developer Y M C or Bk Yes No YES NO YES YES YES NO Action Go to step 5 Check the developing assembly and the devel oping cylinder for which the problem is noted if...

Page 515: ...e trailing edge of a paper Paper Trailing center spot Figure 7 312 n Trailing Center White Spot A trailing center white spot is caused by warping of paper The leading edge of such paper is retained on the transfer belt without uniform contact causing its trailing edge to warp This problem tends to occur particularly when copying on the second side of a two sided copy in a high humidity environment...

Page 516: ... soiled image noted only on a copy made after making a two sided copy Is the image margin within specifica tion Is fogging noted in the image mar gin Is the cleaning blade of the photo sensitive drum locked Is foreign matter found on the clean ing blade of the photosensitive drum cleaning assembly Is deformation or scratches noted on the edge of the cleaning blade Feel the cleaning blade with a fi...

Page 517: ...he web of the fixing assembly normal Is the upper lower roller cleaned normally Clean the delivery roller separation claw external static eliminating separation charging assembly Is the problem corrected Yes No YES YES NO YES Action Replace the side scraper 1 Check to see if toner is leaking from the photo sensitive drum cleaning assembly or the No 2 cleaning assembly end 2 Check the oil removing ...

Page 518: ...urn ON at power on Is oil applied evenly over the upper roller of the fixing assembly Are the insulating bush and the bearing installed properly Is the nip between the upper roller and the lower roller of the fixing assembly within specification Yes No YES NO NO NO NO YES Action 1 Check the upper lower roller of the fixing assembly for scratches 2 Check the separation claw to see if it is position...

Page 519: ...arging assembly Decrease the setting of SP xx corresponding to the mode and paper type using HV SP under ADJUST in service mode Is the problem corrected For a description of SP xx and adjustments see the descriptions given for service mode Increase the setting of SP OFST for HV OFT under ADJUST in service mode Is the problem corrected Check the latent image formation system and the developing syst...

Page 520: ...ring development Turn off the power switch during development Lower the transfer unit and release the transfer unit and the photosensitive drum by hand then lift the hopper to remove the photo sensitive drum unit Is the image on the drum normal Yes No YES YES YES NO YES NO Action Check the wiring of the following PCBs if normal replace it Analog processor PCB Video controller PCB Image processor P...

Page 521: ...original similar to a bank note Are the connectors and wiring between the following PCBs normal Image processor PCB Analog processor PCB CCD unit Cause Potential control fault Primary charging unit Primary charg ing Grid bias output system Anti counterfeit function Original expo sure system anti counterfeit function Connector Wiring Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Yes No YES YES NO NO YES NO YES YES NO Actio...

Page 522: ... analog processor J2504 7 8 5V J2504 5 4 8V J2504 3 4 8V J2504 1 2 15V Yes No NO YES Action See The DC power is absent Try replacing the following parts CCD unit Analog processor PCB Image processor PCB n Checking the Original Exposure System 1 Check to find out if the copyboard glass has ridden over an obstacle 2 Clean the scanning lamp reflecting plate No 1 2 3 mirror standard white plate and co...

Page 523: ...he transfer sheet have dents or deformation Does the Y transfer blade have dents or deformation Is the operation of the locking mechanism of the Y transfer blade normal Is the gear of the photosensitive drum worn or loose Does the flywheel wobble Clean the ends of the photosensitive drum and the spacer rubber Is the problem corrected Yes No YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO Action End Replace it Repla...

Page 524: ...ctions 1 E000 E004 Check the detail code of E000 E004 using JAM ERR under DISPLAY in service mode a E000 XX01 XX02 high order 2 digits representing type as XX 01 indicating upper heater and 02 lower heater and E004 0001 Cause Fixing thermistor open circuit DC controller PCB Triac open circuit AC driver PCB DC controller PCB Step 1 2 3 4 Yes No NO YES NO YES YES NO Action Go to step 3 Check the wir...

Page 525: ...209A 10 GND Likewise measure the voltage between J2209A 11 FRST and J2209A 12 GND Does the voltage decrease from about 5 V gradually when the power switch is turned ON Turn OFF the power switch immediately after the check Is the thermistor THM1 THM2 in even contact with the upper fixing roller Clean the area where the thermistor and the fixing roller are in contact Is the problem corrected Does th...

Page 526: ...s Is the cleaning web more or less used up After replacing the cleaning web has E005 RLS of FUSER under FUNC in service mode been ex ecuted Is the detecting lever of the web length sensor on the web Is the web length sensor PS36 normal Yes No YES NO NO NO YES Action Replace the cleaning web Execute E005 RLS of FUSER under FUNC in service mode Re mount it Replace the web length sensor Replace the D...

Page 527: ...es it operate normally Operate the solenoid using IO of FMISC under FUNC in service mode At this time does the voltage between J2209A 3 and J2209A 4 on the DC controller PCB change from 24 V to 0 V Cause Fixing oil Fixing oil supply route Fixing oil level sensor PS6 Oil pump drive solenoid SL2 DC controller PCB Step 1 2 3 4 5 Yes No NO YES NO NO NO Action Supply oil Remove the clogging or replace ...

Page 528: ...tage change from about 5 V to about 0 V when the main motor starts to rotate Set the tester to the 5VDC range and measure the voltage between J2226A 12 M21PLL and J2226A 14 GND on the DC controller PCB Turn OFF and then ON the power switch Does the voltage change from about 3 V to about 0 V when themain motor starts to rotate Yes No YES YES YES NO YES NO Action Go to step 4 Put a finger through th...

Page 529: ...PCB Action The waste toner case is full imposing excess load on the waste toner feed ing screw Remove the waste toner as shown under F013 0002 Check the wiring if normal replace the waste toner feeding motor Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the waste toner lock detecting switch Replace the DC controller PCB Step 1 2 3 Checks Is 0002 indicated Set the meter to the 12VDC range Does the voltage ...

Page 530: ... 7 402 4 Turn the waste toner feeding motor 3 in the direction of the arrow so that the screw gear 5 moves away from the microswitch lever 4 If it does not move the pipe is still filled with waste toner Perform step 3 once again 3 4 5 Figure 7 403 5 Turn on the power switch 6 Execute FUNC F MISCp MTR in service mode to rotate the waste toner feeding motor Check if the rotation is stable 7 Dispose ...

Page 531: ...drive assembly of the feeding assembly Or is any of them subjected to excess load Set the meter to the 12VDC range Does the voltage between J2213A 6 M9D and J2213A 7 GND on the DC controller PCB change from 5 V to 0 V after the power has been turned on WMUP has ended and INTR begins i e when the tempera ture of the fixing roller reaches 110 C Yes No YES YES NO Action Replace any faulty part and re...

Page 532: ...ve assembly Pick up motor M10 DC controller PCB Step 1 2 Checks Is there a fault in the pick up assem bly feeding roller drive assembly of each cassette holder multifeeder pick up roller drive assembly or registration roller drive assembly Or is any of them subjected to an excess load Set the meter to the 24VDC range When the Start key is pressed does the voltage between J2213A 10 M10D and J2213A ...

Page 533: ...se of the fault Check the wiring from the DC controller to the duplexing feeding motor if normal replace the duplexing feeding motor Replace the DC controller PCB Cause Polishing Oil removing motor drive system Polishing Oil removing motor M15 DC controller PCB Step 1 2 Checks Push the one way clutch lever to rotate the polishing roller Is there any fault e g excess load Set the meter to the 24VDC...

Page 534: ...even toner density Developer Connector Wiring Step 1 2 3 4 Checks Execute FUNC INSTALL INIT Y M C SINIT Y M C K in service mode once again for the color for which E020 is indicated Is the problem corrected Execute STIR for the color for which E020 is indicated for INSTALL under FUNC in service mode Is the problem corrected Replace the developer of the color for which E020 is indicated and execute ...

Page 535: ... of the color for which E020 is indi cated Is the problem corrected Is the front cover open while the transfer frame front cover is removed i e is the SALT sensor subject to stray light Replace the photosensitive drum Is the problem corrected Yes No YES YES NO YES NO YES NO Action Go to step 7 End Be sure to replace the developer after replac ing the toner density sensor Replace the DC controller ...

Page 536: ...deformation Clean the inside by referring to 3 Disassem bling and Cleaning the Inside of the SALT Sen sor under E SALT Sensor in Chapter 4 Mechanical System Check the wiring from the DC controller 2 to the solenoid if normal replace the solenoid Cause SALT sensor dirt SALT sensor shutter Shutter open close solenoid Step 1 2 Checks Is the window of the SALT sensor soiled with toner Is the opening c...

Page 537: ...XX Numeral SALT sensor Alphabet toner density sensor Replace the toner density sensor of the color for which E020 is indi cated Is the problem corrected Replace the SALT sensor Is the problem corrected Replace the photosensitive drum Is the problem corrected Does the developing cylinder of the color for which E020 is indicated rotating Is toner present inside the hopper Is the level of toner insid...

Page 538: ...hich E020 is indicated approaches 0 Is E020 indicated after copying f E020 XXF1 04F2 Cause YMC hopper YMC error sensor Bk hopper SALT sensor Step 1 2 3 4 5 Checks Is the detailed code 04F2 Is the level of toner inside the hopper for which E020 is indicated above the toner sensor Disconnect the connector of the toner level sensor front of toner Replace the error sensor hopper rear After replacement...

Page 539: ...hly Do the belt and the pulley rotate smoothly Set the meter to the 12VDC range When the Start key is pressed does the voltage between the following terminals on the DC controller PCB change from 5 V to 0 V for Y J2226A 7 J2226A 8 for M J2226A 10 J2226A 11 for C J2223B 2 J2223B 3 for Bk J2223B 5 J2223B 6 Yes No NO NO YES NO Action Check the inside of the developing assembly for foreign matter Chec...

Page 540: ... smooth See the descriptions on how to release the lifter Is the lifter sensor PS2 PS3 normal See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the connector J2239 from the DC controller PCB Set the meter to the X100Ω range and measure the resistance between the following terminals on the motor side Is it about 60Ω J2239B 5 and J2239B 6 Yes No NO NO NO...

Page 541: ...n OFF the power switch and disconnect the connector J2222 from the DC controller PCB Set the meter to the X100Ω range and measure the resistance between the following terminals on the motor side Is it about 60Ω M16 J2222A 7 and J2222A 6 M17 J2222A 11 and J2222A 6 Connect the connector and turn ON the power switch Set the meter to the 30VDC range and connect the probe to GND and the probe to the fo...

Page 542: ...h when E041 is indicated Turn OFF and ON the power switch to clear E041 Does bit 4 of address 801004 under DISPLAY SENSOR in service mode change when the lifter upper switch SW8001 is pressed by a finger Turn OFF and ON the power switch and open the paper deck cover Does the voltage between J2223A 4 and J2223A 3 on the DC controller change from 0 V to 24 V when closing the cover Yes No NO NO YES Y...

Page 543: ...cted Yes No NO YES YES NO Cause Lifter lower limit switch SW8002 Paper deck motor M8001 DC controller PCB Step 1 2 3 Checks Is the lifter down and pushing the switch when E041 is indicated Turn OFF and ON the power switch to clear E041 Does bit 5 of address 801004 under DISPLAY SENSOR in service mode change when the lifter lower limit switch SW8002 is pressed by a finger Turn OFF and ON the power ...

Page 544: ... inserted properly Are the charging wires of the primary charging assembly and the pre primary charging assembly broken Are the charging wires of the primary charging assembly and the pre primary charging assembly soiled Is there electrical continuity between charging wire grid and shielding plate Further is there a trace of leakage on the primary charging assembly or the pre primary charging asse...

Page 545: ...ve drum grounded Clean the potential sensor Is the problem corrected Check the temperature and humidity using ANALOG under DISPLAY in service mode Is the environment sensor normal Yes No YES NO NO YES YES NO YES Action Check the connectors on the HVT2 PCB and the high voltage cable if normal replace the HVT2 PCB Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the pre exposure lamp if normal replace...

Page 546: ...on End Check the wiring from the AC driver PCB and the drum heater if normal replace the drum heater See The drum heater fails to turn ON Cause Drum thermistor DC controller PCB Step 1 Checks Disconnect J2216A from the DC controller PCB and measure the resistance of the terminals on the harness side for Y J2216A 4 and J2216A 5 for M J2216A 9 and J2216A 10 for C J2216B 4 and J2216B 5 for Bk J2216B ...

Page 547: ... drive shaft by a finger Does it turn smoothly Take care not to touch the transfer belt Turn OFF and ON the power switch to clear E070 Is 25 V present at J3201 2 and 5 V at J3201 4 on the transfer belt drive PCB Turn OFF and ON the power switch Does the voltage at J2219B 4 on the DC controller PCB change from 5 V to 0 V Yes No NO NO NO NO NO YES NO Action Install it correctly Clean it or replace i...

Page 548: ...heck the instructions on how to check photointerrupters Turn the web drive shaft by a finger Does it turn smoothly Turn OFF and ON the power switch then select two sided copying mode and press the Start key Does the voltage at J2218A 4 on the DC controller PCB change from 0 V to 24 V Yes No NO NO YES NO Action Replace the sensor Remove the cause of poor rotation Check the wiring from the DC contro...

Page 549: ...he instructions on how to check photointerrupters Turn the transfer belt lifter drive shaft by a finger Does it turn smoothly Turn OFF and ON the power switch to clear E074 Press the Start key and check the operation of the lifter of the transfer belt by the eye Does the transfer belt move up and down Turn OFF and ON the power switch once again and press the Start key Does the pick up motor rotate...

Page 550: ... in service mode Is operation noise heard Replace the motor Is the problem corrected Yes No NO YES YES NO Action Check the operation if normal replace the sensor Check the drive system and the wiring if normal replace the DC controller PCB End Replace the DC controller PCB Cause Transfer belt edge sensor PS17 PS18 PS19 PS20 flag operation Transfer belt edge sensor DC controller PCB Step 1 2 Checks...

Page 551: ...C controller PCB J2101 1 J2101 4 5V J2101 8 J2101 9 8V J2101 7 J2101 8 8V Is there a fault in the connection between the video controller PCB and the laser driver PCB of the color for which E100 is indicated Y detail code 0101 J2106 J1301Y M detail code 0201 J2107 J1301M C detail code 0301 J2108 J1301C Bk detailcode 0401 J2109 J1301K Is the laser power normal Clean the light receiving face of the ...

Page 552: ...er Yes No NO YES NO YES Action Check the wiring if normal replace the DC power supply PCB lower Re connect it Make adjustments If output is absent re place the laser unit Try replacing the following parts in sequence Laser unit Video controller PCB DC controller PCB 25 E110 Cause DC power supply PCB 1 upper Laser scanner motor driver PCB DC control ler PCB Step 1 2 Checks Is power present at J6297...

Page 553: ...CD unit Is the problem cor rected Generate a test pattern PG 06 grid Is the discrepancy from the M pattern in main scanning direction Yes No YES NO NO YES NO Action Go to step 4 Check the transfer belt where the image position correction pattern is formed if there are scratches replace the transfer belt Otherwise perform the instructions given for image adjust ments Replace the DC controller PCB A...

Page 554: ...or PS40 Shutter closed sensor PS39 Shutter drive system Parts deforma tion dirt Step 1 2 3 4 5 Checks Execute UFNC F MISCp MTR in service mode to operate the shutter Does the shutter drive motor operate normally Is the shutter open sensor PS40 normal in the case of E194 0001 Is the shutter closed sensor PS39 normal if E194 0002 Check the shutter drive system as shown below Does it move smoothly Is...

Page 555: ...nt 1 5 Remove the screw 4 and remove the shutter 3 At this time take care not to deform the grounding plate 5 Take care also not to lose the screw 4 it is a special screw 6 With lint free paper dry wipe the top and bottom faces of the shutter 3 top and bottom faces of the support plate front 1 and top and bottom faces of the support plate rear 6 5 6 4 3 1 2 Figure 7 405 7 Dry wipe the LED 7 with l...

Page 556: ...ner motor driver PCB and J1306A on the reader unit controller PCB Yes No NO YES NO Action Check the wiring if normal replace the main power supply PCB Re connect it Replace the following parts in the order indicated Scanner motor driver PCB Reader controller PCB Cause Lamp regulator PCB Reader unit controller PCB Step 1 2 Checks Does the scanning lamp turn ON Is there a fault in the connection bet...

Page 557: ...O relay PCB and the IP MOTHER PCB connected se curely Yes No NO YES Action Re connect it Replace the following parts in the order indicated IP ECO PCB IP MOTHER PCB IP ECO relay PCB 31 E620 Step 1 Cause Connector wiring Checks Is there a fault in the connection of the ED PCB IP memory PCB or image processor PCB Yes No NO YES Action Re connect it Replace the following parts in the order indicated E...

Page 558: ... projector controller PC and J203 on the DC power supply J102 on the projector controller PCB and SSR1 Set the meter to the 300VAC range and measure the voltage between J201 1 and 3 of the DC power supply Is the rated AC voltage present when projector mode starts Press the circuit breaker Is it reset Set the meter to the 30VDC range and measure the voltage between J103 5 5 V and J103 6 POWON on th...

Page 559: ...C power supply 1 Replace the DC controller PCB 34 E800 Cause Malfunction J2 poor connec tion Power switch SW1 DC controller PCB Step 1 2 3 Checks Turn OFF and ON the power switch Is the problem corrected Is the connection of the relay con nector J2 on the power switch SW1 secure Set the meter to the 1KΩ range Disconnect the relay connector J2 and connect the probes of the meter to the following te...

Page 560: ...ace SW1 Check the wiring of the AC power line and con nector for poor contact Cause Power plug Power source Circuit breaker CB1 CB2 faulty or OFF Power cord Line filter LF1 Power switch SW1 faulty Wiring Step 1 2 3 4 5 Checks Is the power plug connected to the power outlet Is the rated AC voltage present at the power outlet Is the rated voltage present between F3 and F4 of RL1 Check both terminals...

Page 561: ...t normal Disconnect all connectors except for the following J5327M on the DC power supply PCB 1 upper J5301M on the DC power supply PCB 1 lower J5337 on the DC power supply PCB 2 Connect the power plug and turn ON the power switch Is the DC power supply output of the above connec tors on the DC power supply normal Be careful to avoid shorting the connectors Keep in mind that 24VU and 214VR are not...

Page 562: ...f the following connectors and the wiring between the connectors normal J602 on the scanner motor driver PCB J1306 on the reader unit controller PCB Set the meter to the 50VDC range and measure the voltage between the following terminals on the scan ner motor driver Is it normal J601 2 and 1 about 5 V J601 4 and 3 about 8 V J601 6 and 5 about 24 V Replace the scanner motor driver Is the problem co...

Page 563: ... the power switch Set the meter to the 300VAC range and measure the voltage between J131 1 and 4 on the harness side Is the rated voltage present Turn OFF the power switch and connect J131 Set the meter to the 50VEDC range and turn ON the power switch Is 24 VDC present between J6230 2 24 V and J6230 1 GND Set the meter to the 50VDC range and connect the probes to J6230 4 LAON and J6230 1 GND on th...

Page 564: ...ent of the latch assemblyof the cassette grip nor mal Push up the pick up roller releasing lever by a finger Does the pick up roller move down Is the lifter position sensor normal Set the tester to the 30VDC range and insert the cassette Does the voltage between the following terminals change from about 0 V to about 24 V M16 J2222A 7 6 M17 J2222A 11 6 Yes No NO NO NO NO YES NO Action Check the ins...

Page 565: ...er PCB Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Checks Does the ADD PAPER message remain ON Slide out and then in the cassette Are the sounds of lifter lowering and of the lifter motor turning heard Is the drive belt attached properly Is the paper moved so that its leading edge reaches the registra tion roller assembly Is the drive from the pick up motor transmitted to the cassette holder through the gears Does the pic...

Page 566: ...hes the registration roller Is the drive of the pick up motor transmitted to the cassette holder through the gears Does the pick up separation feeding roller rotate Does the ADD PAPER message remain ON even after the Start key has been pressed After the Start key has been pressed does the voltage between the following terminals on the DC controller PCB change at the pick up timing Cassette 2 Pick ...

Page 567: ...lutch Replace the DC controller PCB Action Check the wiring if normal replace CL6 Replace the pick up roller Check the lifter plate drive system As necessary adjust or replace it Check the wiring if normal replace the clutch Check the wiring if normal replace SL5 Replace the DC controller PCB Cause Multifeeder pick up clutch CL6 Multifeeder pick up roller Lifter plate Paper thickness roller clutch...

Page 568: ...tion of the high voltage cable for Y transfer charging proper Is there a scratch or a dent in the transfer belt Is paper curled or wavy Try fresh paper Is the problem corrected Try Canon recommended paper Is the problem corrected Is the problem noted on paper other than plain paper Yes No NO NO YES YES YES YES YES Action Check the locking mecha nism for the transfer blade Re connect it Replace the...

Page 569: ...etween the following terminals on the harness side Is it about 20Ω for Y J2209B 1 and 2 for M J2209B 3 and 4 for C J2209B 5 and 6 for Bk J2209B 7 and 8 Connect J2239 and turn ON the power switch Set the meter to the 30VDC range and measure the voltage between the following terminals on the DC controller PCB Does the voltage change from about 0 V to about 24 V for Y J2239A 1 and 2 for M J2239A 3 an...

Page 570: ...g drawer connector J6410 J6410 1 and 4 J6410 5 and 8 Is there electrical continuity in the thermal switch Set the meter to the 1Ω range Does the index of the meter swing when the probe of the meter is connected to the following connector of the fixing drawer connector J6019 J6019B 7 and 5 J6019B 7 and 6 Does the index of the meter swing when the probe of the meter is connected to both terminals of...

Page 571: ...he meter are connected to the following terminals of the faston of RL1 FT35 and FT40 Set the meter to the 10VDC range and connect the probes of the meter to the terminals of the following connectors of the DC controller PCB Does the index of the meter indicate 5 V J2213 B11 and GND J2213 B10 and GND Yes No NO YES NO Action Check the power switch and the relay RL1 if normal see AC power is absent C...

Page 572: ... Does the index of the meter swing THM4 for Y J2216A 4 and 5 THM5 for Bk J2216B 9 and 10 THM6 for M J2216A 9 and 10 THM7 for C J2216B 4 and 5 Are the connection and wiring of the following connectors normal J9 J5 J6 J61 Power saving switch Drum heater Disconnect the power outlet and remove the drum heater brush cover Is the contact of the drum heater brush normal Install the drum heater brush cove...

Page 573: ... Does the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB change from about 24 V to about 0 V and then to 24 V when the Start key is pressed Be sure to select a copying mode appropriate to the counter operation Yes No NO NO YES Action Check the wiring from J2212 to the counter if normal replace the counter Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the counter Counter CNT1 CNT2 CNT3 CNT4 C...

Page 574: ...er hygrometer in the room Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the connector J6 Set the meter to the 1Ω range Does the index of the meter swing when the probe of the meter is connected to the terminals of the following con nectors Upper Cassette Heater J6M1 1 and J6M1 3 Lower Cassette Heater J6M2 1 and J6M2 3 Are the connection and the wiring between the following connectors normal J61 J62 pow...

Page 575: ...d rail Check the mirror mount for an object that may come into contact Check the drum motor drive system drum motor gear photosensitive drum flywheel Check the fan Check the developing motor drive system Check the reciprocating operation of the develop ing assembly cleaning screw and cleaning blade Check the pick up toner system and the hopper motor drive system Check the fixing motor drive system...

Page 576: ...1000 may be divided into the following blocks in terms of where paper tend to jam 1 Pick up assembly 2 Pick up feeding assembly 3 Transfer unit assembly 4 Separation pre fixing feeding assembly 5 Fixing delivery assembly 6 Delivery vertical path assembly duplexing reversing assembly pre holding tray feeding assembly 7 Duplexing unit stacking assembly re pick up assembly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 7 501 ...

Page 577: ...jam Stationary jam Jam at power on or when the front cover pick up cover deliv ery cover is opened closed Jam when the front cover pick up cover delivery cover is opened closed during copying operation Cause code 01 02 10 11 Sensor code 01 02 03 04 31 32 33 34 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 Sensor name Registration paper sensor Pick up vertical path 1 sensor Pick up vertical path 2 sensor Pick up vertical p...

Page 578: ...tte pick up assembly deformed or worn Is each of the sensors P21 PS25 PS27 of the pick up assembly normal Make copies in manual mode Do the multifeeder pick up roller and the paper thickness detecting roller rotate Try Canon recommended paper Is the problem corrected Is the transparency of the specified type and is it oriented correctly Yes No NO NO YES YES NO NO YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO Actio...

Page 579: ...ncy of the specified type and is it oriented correctly Does the registration roller registra tion roller drive assembly operate normally Is the registration roller deformed or worn Is the operation of each sensor OHPS PS1 PS14 of the pick up feeding assembly normal Yes No YES YES NO NO YES YES NO Cause Paper Transparency Registration roller Registra tion roller drive assembly Registration roller O...

Page 580: ...Replace the transfer belt motor See IV Retention fails Replace the faulty parts Further remove the cause Replace the problem part in addition remove the cause of the fault Replace the DC controller PCB 3 Transfer Unit Assembly 4 Separation Pre Fixing Feeding Assembly Yes No NO YES NO NO YES Checks Is the separation charging assembly operating normally Is the separation claw worn or deformed Is the...

Page 581: ...the lower roller pressure nip within specification Is the web taken up properly Is the surface of the thermistor soiled Does the delivery sensor lever operate smoothly Does the internal delivery delivery sensor PS35 PS34 operate nor mally Does the internal external delivery roller rotate smoothly Does the delivery paper deflecting plate operate normally Yes No YES NO YES YES NO NO YES NO NO NO NO ...

Page 582: ...t reversing motor drive assembly Check the waste toner feeding motor drive assembly if normal check the reversal drive clutch CL16 Check the lever and the wiring if normal replace the sensor Check the duplexing feeding motor drive assembly Check the duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid SL11 Check the guide plates and the duplexing unit feeding assembly for foreign matter and defor mation Chec...

Page 583: ...oller of the duplexing unit pick up assembly rotate while copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Is the pick up roller deformed or worn Is the separation roller of the duplexing unit pick up assembly deformed or worn Is the feeding roller of the duplexing unit pick up assembly deformed or worn Yes No NO YES NO YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES NO Action Install it properly and check the inside of t...

Page 584: ... guide plate soiled with toner or the like Is the lower roller pressure nip within specification Yes No YES YES YES NO YES NO YES Action Check the pick up assem bly Check the registration roller The paper may be moist Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper Advise the user to use recommended paper Check the heater of each pick up assembly to see if it is operating normally Clean it ...

Page 585: ...COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 149 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS VI ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTION OF ELECTRICAL PARTS ...

Page 586: ...APAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS Figure 7 601 PS15 PS20 PS18 PS17 PS19 PS11 PS10 PS16 PS14 PS13 PS2 OHPS PS5 PS4 PS3 PS1 PS12 PS34 PS38 PS35 PS32 PS33 PS8 PS9 PS37 PS30 PS22 PS31 PS29 PS21 PS25 PS26 PS8002 PS8001 PS28 PS27 PS23 PS24 PS39 PS40 A Sensors ...

Page 587: ...ation sensor Transfer belt cleaning web length sensor Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 Transfer belt lifter sensor 2 Post registration paper sensor Separation sensor Transfer belt home position sensor Transfer belt edge sensor 1 Transfer belt edge sensor 2 Transfer belt edge sensor 3 Transfer belt edge sensor 4 Pick up vertical path 1 sensor Paper deck connection sensor Cassette 1 paper sensor Casset...

Page 588: ...NC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS Figure 7 602 TS4 TS8 TS7 TS3 TS6 TS2 TS5 TS1 MFSVR CTY CTM CTC CTK EV1 ATRY ATRM ATRC SALTY SALTM SALTC SALTK ...

Page 589: ...ATR Y ATR M ATR C SALT Y SALT M SALT C SALT K CTY CTM CTC CTK EV1 Function name Multifeeder paper width sensor Y toner level sensor upper M toner level sensor upper C toner level sensor upper Bk toner level sensor upper Y toner level sensor lower M toner level sensor lower C toner level sensor lower Bk toner level sensor lower ATR sensor Y ATR sensor M ATR sensor C SALT sensor Y SALT sensor M SALT...

Page 590: ...7 154 COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS Figure 7 603 SVR1 SVR2 SEU1 SEU2 LF1 CB1 CB2 RL1 ...

Page 591: ...CTIONS Symbol Name Paper length sensor photointerrupter Variable resistor unit Circuit breaker Relay Noise filter Notation SEU1 SEU2 SVR1 SVR2 CB1 CB2 RL1 LT1 Function name Cassette 1 paper length sensor unit Cassette 2 paper length sensor unit Cassette 1 paper width sensor Cassette 2 paper width sensor CB1 CB2 Fixing relay Noise filter CB LF ...

Page 592: ...100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS B Lamps Switches Thermistors and Heaters Figure 7 604 LA5 LA4 LA3 LA2 LA1 PTS1 CNT4 CNT5 CNT6 CNT3 CNT2 CNT1 SW5 SW4 SW1 SW8001 SW8002 SW6 SW2 SW3 SW8003 SW8 ...

Page 593: ... CNT1 CNT2 CNT3 CNT4 CNT5 CNT6 Function name Paper thickness sensor Front cover switch Power switch Control key switch Waste toner lock detecting switch Fixing lever switch Multifeeder open switch Power saving switch Paper deck upper limit switch Paper deck lower limit switch Paper deck cover open closed detecting switch Pre exposure lamp Y Pre exposure lamp M Pre exposure lamp C Pre exposure lamp...

Page 594: ...C CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS Figure 7 605 THM1 THM2 TP1 TP2 THM5 TP6 THM7 THM6 THM4 THM3 TP8001 TP5 TP4 TP3 H1 H2 H6 H5 H4 H3 H9 H8 H7 H8001 ...

Page 595: ...er fixing assembly thermistor Polygon mirror scanner assembly thermistor Y drum thermistor Bk drum thermistor M drum thermistor C drum thermistor Upper fixing assembly thermal switch Lower fixing assembly thermal switch Cassette 2 heater thermal switch Cassette 1 heater thermal switch Holding tray heater thermal switch Scanning lamp thermal switch Paper deck heater thermal switch Upper fixing heat...

Page 596: ...NC CANON CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS C Clutches Figure 7 606 CL16 CL17 CL6 CL7 CL8 CL8001 CL8002 CL11 CL10 CL12 CL14 CL13 CL15 CL5 CL4 CL3 CL2 CL1 ...

Page 597: ... toner supply clutch C toner supply clutch Bk toner supply clutch upper Bk toner supply clutch lower Multifeeder pick up clutch Paper thickness detecting roller clutch Registration roller clutch Duplexing unit pick up roller clutch Pick up vertical path roller 1 clutch Cassette 1 pick up clutch Pick up vertical path roller 2 clutch Cassette 2 pick up clutch Pick up vertical path roller 3 clutch Re...

Page 598: ...00 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS D Solenoids Figure 7 607 SL4 SL3 SL2 SL11L SL11R SL11S SL13 SL12 SL18 SL17BK SL17C SL17M SL17Y SL6 SL7C SL7M SL7BK SL7Y SL5 SL16 SL8001 SL8 SL9 SL10 SL14 SL15 ...

Page 599: ...enoid C transfer blade solenoid Bk transfer blade solenoid Duplexing unit pick up roller releasing solenoid Cassette 1 pick up roller releasing solenoid Cassette 2 pick up roller releasing solenoid Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid S Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid R Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid L Stopper plate solenoid Feeding roller solenoid Delivery paper deflecti...

Page 600: ...N CLC1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS E Fans Figure 7 608 FM5 FM6 FM8 FM9 FM4 FM16 FM13 FM12 FM18 FM17 FM1 FM3 FM20 FM19 FM7 PUFM1 PUFM2 FM14 FM15 FM10 FM11 FM2 ...

Page 601: ... fan 2 Delivery assembly cooling fan 3 Laser cooling fan front Laser cooling fan rear Primary exhaust fan Pre fixing feeding fan Primary suction fan left Primary suction fan right Scanner assembly cooling fan 1 Scanner assembly cooling fan 2 Scanner assembly cooling fan 3 Scanner assembly cooling fan 4 Digital unit cooling fan 1 Digital unit cooling fan 2 Digital unit cooling fan 3 Power supply co...

Page 602: ...0 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS F Motors Figure 7 609 M1 M10 M18Y M18M M21 M19 M18BK M20 M18C M9 M28 M30 M29 M11 M14 M22 M12 M24BK M24C M24M M24Y M23 M17 M16 M15 M8001 M2 M3 M4 M6 M8 M7 M5 M13 ...

Page 603: ... slant correction motor Bk mirror ratio correction motor Fixing motor Pick up motor Pre fixing feeding motor Transfer belt cleaning web motor Transfer belt swinging motor Transfer belt motor Polishing oil removing motor Cassette 1 lifter motor Cassette 2 lifter motor Y developing motor M developing motor C developing motor Bk developing motor Duplexing feeding motor Waste toner feeding motor Photo...

Page 604: ...C1000 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS G PCBs Figure 7 610 20 4 4 1 1 3 2 21 28 23 8 16 10 37 38 12 13 14 9 7 11 26 6 29 29 27 25 17 18 5 33 24 19 34 30 31 32 22 15 35 36 ...

Page 605: ... for the printer unit Controls video signals Controls the sequence of operations for the reader unit Controls the toner sensor of the hopper assembly Relays digital image signals Processes digital images Processes digital images Controls the editor Compresses and stores digital image data Stores image data from external devices Relays multifeeder control signals Measures the machine inside tempera...

Page 606: ...ed in the field VRs that must not be used in the field Figure 7 611 1 DC Controller PCB B11 A1 J2213 B1 A11 B15 A1 J2212B1 A15 B8 A1 J2239 B1 A8 B12 A1 J2210 B1 A12 B15 A1 J2209 B1 A15 B12 A1 J2208 B1 A12 B15 A1 J2207 B1 A15 B10 A1 J2206B1 A10 51 52 1 2 J2205 99 100 49 50 19 18 2 1 J2204 33 34 16 17 17 18 1 2 J2203 31 32 15 16 B11 A1 J2202 B1 A11 1 J2201 6 B13 A1 J2215 B1 A13 B8 A1 J2214 B1 A8 B10...

Page 607: ...scanning enable signal ON in response to the C sub scanning enable signal On in response to the Bk sub scanning enable signal ON in response to the ITOP signal ON in response to 24 VU ON when 5 V power is present Table 7 601 Figure 7 612 50 49 100 99 2 1 52 51 LED2106 LED2102 LED2101 LED2107 LED2103 LED2108 LED2104 LED2109 LED2105 J2111 6 1 J2102 7 1 J2103 1 6 J2104 1 7 J2105 1 3 2 4 37 39 38 40 J...

Page 608: ... in response to M BD error ON in response to C BD error ON in response to Bk BD error ON in response to the Y sub scanning enable signal ON in response to the M sub scanning enable signal ON in response to the C sub scanning enable signal ON in response to the Bk sub scanning enable signal 100 99 50 49 J1308 52 51 2 1 B40 B39 A40 A39 J1309 B2 B1 A2 A1 A1 A2 B1 B2 J1310 A33 A34 B33 B34 A2 A1 B2 B1 ...

Page 609: ...ory PCB Figure 7 615 J206 240 239 120 119 122 121 2 1 J205 240 239 120 119 122 121 2 1 J201 40 39 80 79 2 1 42 41 J202 1 2 41 42 39 40 79 80 J203 1 2 51 52 49 50 99 100 J204 1 6 1 2 71 72 LED805 LED806 LED807 LED808 LED801 LED802 LED803 LED804 J814 1 2 71 72 J813 1 2 71 72 J812 1 2 71 72 J811 1 6 1 2 51 52 49 50 99 100 J801 J803 200 199 100 99 97 102 101 2 3 1 J802 1 2 41 42 39 40 79 80 J804 ...

Page 610: ...sub scanning data read enable signal ON in response to the C sub scanning data read enable signal ON in response to the M sub scanning data read enable signal ON in response to the Y sub scanning data read enable signal ON in response to power on ON in response to the sub scanning data write enable signal ON in response to the main scanning data read enable signal ON in response to the main scanni...

Page 611: ...D IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 175 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 7 Transfer Belt Motor Driver PCB Figure 7 617 Figure 7 618 8 AC Driver PCB 5 1 J3203 3 1 J3202 1 4 J3201 VR3201 1 11 J2802 6 1 J2801 1 11 J2804 1 13 J2803 1 5 J2806 1 2 J2808 3 1 J2807 1 10 J2805 ...

Page 612: ...OOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 9 Scanner Motor Driver PCB Figure 7 619 10 Laser Driver PCB n For Y M Figure 7 620 6 J601 1 5 J603 1 10 Q601 1 10 Q602 1 10 Q603 1 A12 A1 B1 J602 B12 VR3007 VR3004 VR3002 VR3010 VR3009 VR3006 VR3005 VR3003 VR3008 VR3001 J3001 J3002 J3003 1 2 3 4 5 20 27 15 30 1 3 2 4 37 39 38 40 1 2 3 ...

Page 613: ...R3009 VR3006 VR3005 VR3003 VR3008 VR3001 J3001 J3002 J3003 1 2 3 4 5 20 27 15 30 1 3 2 4 37 39 38 40 1 2 3 Table 7 604 VR VR3001 VR3002 VR3003 VR3004 VR3005 VR3006 VR3007 VR3008 VR3009 VR3010 Function Use them when adjusting the laser power when replacing the laser unit Use them when adjusting the laser power or the laser beam intensity when replacing the laser unit For factory adjustment Do not t...

Page 614: ...00 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 11 IP ECO PCB Figure 7 622 12 Lamp Regulator PCB CN1 51 1 100 50 1 9 J4 J10 J131 1 4 1 9 J4 5 1 J12 J6230 J11 J135 3 1 VR51 Figure 7 623 ...

Page 615: ...00 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 179 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 13 Environment Sensor PCB Figure 7 624 14 HVT1 6 J1 1 VR1 J3 3 1 VR2 J2 1 4 Figure 7 625 VR4101 I K C M Y 1 8 J4102 2 1 J4101 ...

Page 616: ...PRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 15 HVT2 n HVT2 1 Figure 7 626 Table 7 605 1 J4603 4 1 J4601 2 1 W4601 1 8 AUX P LED4601 LED4602 J4605 J4607 Function Y C ON in response to pre primary charging output Y C ON in response to primary charging output LED LED4601 LED4602 ...

Page 617: ...PRIME AU JAPON 7 181 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS n HVT2 2 Figure 7 627 Table 7 606 8 J4602 1 3 J4604 1 1 W4601 2 8 AUX P LED4604 LED4603 J4606 LED LED4603 LED4604 Function M Bk ON in response to pre primary charging output M Bk ON in response to primary charging output ...

Page 618: ...ED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 16 HVT3 n HVT3 A Figure 7 628 n HVT3 B 7 1 J4705 8 1 J4702 1 2 J4701 2 1 J4706 VR4701 J4703 1 VR4702 J4703 2 1 7 WJ5001A 1 6 WJ5001B 6 1 J5001B 1 4 J5005 VR5001 J5004 1 2 J5003 1 2 J5001A 2 1 Figure 7 629 ...

Page 619: ...00 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 183 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 17 HVT4 Figure 7 630 18 HVT5 Figure 7 631 1 J5104 5 1 W5101 1 7 1 W5101 2 7 1 1 2 J5101 J5102 5 VR5101 J5103 VR5201 1 4 J5201 ...

Page 620: ... 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 19 ED board A1 Figure 7 632 LED1501 1 9 1 2 41 42 39 40 79 80 J1501 J1504 240 239 120 119 122 121 2 1 J1502 40 39 80 79 1 2 42 41 J1503 Table 7 607 LED LED1501 Function ON at power on ...

Page 621: ...806 80 79 40 39 42 41 2 1 J1803 51 52 1 2 99 100 49 50 J1802 C32 B32 A32 C1 B1 A1 J1801 LED LED1801 LED1802 LED1803 LED1804 LED1805 LED1806 Function ON in response to 5 V ON in response to the image data write enable signal to the IPU etc ON in response to the Bk image data read enable signal from the IPU etc ON in response to the C image data read enable signal from the IPU etc ON in response to ...

Page 622: ... 1000S 3100 REV 2 MAY 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 8 J3702 1 9 16 J3703 B2 B1 A2 A1 B12 B13 A12 A13 J3704 49 50 24 25 27 26 2 1 J3701 C32 B32 A32 C1 B1 A1 21 Preview monitor board Figure 7 634 ...

Page 623: ...ress the key on the control panel 2 Press the and keys keypad at the same time 3 Press the key The screen shown in Figure 7 701 appears 2 Ending Service Mode Press the Reset key M S R P F DISP ADJUST FUNC COUNTER OPTION TEST A Outline The CLC1000 s service mode is divided into the following six No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Notation DISP ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST COUNTER Description Control display mode Adjustment...

Page 624: ...hows the label attached to the inside of the cover of the service document compartment found on the front cover left Each machine is adjusted at the factory and the adjustment values are recorded on the label Be sure to record any new values on the label if you executed service mode and changed values after replacing a part See After Replacing the Major Parts in this chapter ...

Page 625: ...2 SNSR RNK P OFST Y P OFST M P OFST C P OFST K Y REG H Y REG V C REG H C REG V K REG H K REG V UP ADJ LOW ADJ MULT ADJ DECK ADJ REFE ADJ VSYC ADJ MRGN L MRGN R MRGN T MRGN B UPPER CR LOWER CR 447 62 429 41 516 51 889 804 798 803 819 818 818 181 194 157 687 746 756 318 514 515 515 513 599 600 599 499 132 133 137 111 2 184 102 3199 2408 E 10 6 2 4 136 124 140 130 145 127 115 112 128 128 128 180 32 3...

Page 626: ...y to accept a command for copying operation Executing service mode not ready to accept a command for copying operation Executing an operation initial rotation etc Executing copying operation Service error Cover open Paper jam Level 2 items Value input items are highlighted Selecting by touching an item causes the item to be indicated normally ready to accept an input Stores the entered value The v...

Page 627: ...F SENSOR JAM ERR PRJ INF Note 1 BLT DRFT RF INF Note 1 SORT INF Note 1 Indicates the version of the ROM Indicates the status of the option Indicates the measurement taken by the analog sensor Indicates the density of the developer Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential control data Indicates the shading black offset data Indicates the sensor DC controller input port Indicates the pres...

Page 628: ...es the version of the ROM on the reader control ler PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the original scan ner motor driver PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the IP ECO PCB Indicates the version of the ROM of the IPU Indicates the serial number Indicates the type of count control of the copy counter See the table that follows Indic...

Page 629: ...l size total counter Bk print Bk copy counter Counter 5 Full color print counter Full color copy small size Full color print full color copy small size Full color copy counter small size Counter 6 Two sided copy counter Full color print small size Bk print Bk copy counter small size Mono color counter n Details of Language Number R CON DC CON DC controller PCB Reader unit controller PCB 1st digit ...

Page 630: ... the status of the IPU2 PS IPU IPU PS 0 I F board absent 1 Only I F board present 2 PS IPU present 3 PS IPU extension board present 4 IPU present 5 PS IPU IPU and extension board present Indicates the status connection of the Control Card V CCV 0 CCV absent 1 CCV present Indicates the status connection of the paper deck DECK 0 Paper deck absent 1 Paper deck absent Indicates connection of the RDF R...

Page 631: ...Environment sensor output value 0 to 1023 Environment sensor output conversion value Indicates the machine internal absolute humidity g obtained from the measure ments collected by the environment sensor BODY XXXg XXX Computed value Converted value Indicates the upper fixing roller temperature output of thermistor THM1 FUSER U XXX C XXX THM1 output value 0 to 1023 THM1 output conversion value C In...

Page 632: ...C REF Y M C Description Indicates the discrepancy of the density of the devel oper on the developing cylinder each color in refer ence to the target value in Darker than target value Lighter than target value The value is the result of computations based on SGNL and REF stored under ATR INIT and SGNL and REF on the screen Indicates the measurement AD conversion of the reference signal each color M...

Page 633: ...tes the discrepancy of the density of the pattern on the drum each color in reference to the target value in Indicates the measurement AD conversion value of the density of the toner on the drum each color Measurements are taken for each copying run Indicates the measurement AD conversion value of the SALT reference signal each color Measurements are taken for each copying run Indicates the measur...

Page 634: ...SHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS M S R P F ADJUST COUNTER OPTION TEST DENS FUNC DISP xxxx xxxx xxxx WINDOW M WINDOW C WINDOW Y 3 3 xxxx WINDOW K Item WINDOW Description Indicates the window soiling correction coefficient The value decreases when the SALT sensor becomes soiled Remarks Normal if between 60 and 140 ...

Page 635: ...ed by EPC under FUNC Item VOO Y M C K VFF Y M C K VDC Y M C K VG Y M C K Description Indicates the target value for VD with laser output at 00 Indicates the optimum value computed by potential control Indicates the target value for VL with laser output at off Indicates the optimum value computed by potential control Indicates the target value for Vdc developing bias DC component Indicates the opti...

Page 636: ...OF G xx xx xxx xxx BOARD R TARGET R BOF R Item BAR CODE BOARD B G R TARGET B G R BOF B G R Description Indicates the bar code value of the standard white plate Indicates the output of each CCD when the standard white plate is read output value after A D conversion Indicates the shading target value Indicates the output of each CCD when the scanning lamp is off odd bit even bit Remarks The value is...

Page 637: ...READY SENSOR DISP xxxxxxxx 800000H xxxxxxxx 800001H xxxxxxxx 800002H xxxxxxxx 800003H xxxxxxxx 800004H xxxxxxxx 800005H xxxxxxxx 801000H xxxxxxxx 801001H xxxxxxxx 801002H xxxxxxxx 801003H xxxxxxxx 801004H xxxxxxxx 801005H xxxxxxxx 802000H xxxxxxxx 802001H xxxxxxxx 802002H xxxxxxxx 802003H xxxxxxxx 802004H xxxxxxxx 802005H Item 800000H 808004H Description Indicates the input ports of the DC control...

Page 638: ...error Photosensitive drum heater power error Fixing heater power error Reserved Reserved AC input Power switch Power supply assembly fan operation error Overheating 24 VU Overheating 24 VR Overheating 5 VU 24 VU error 5 VU error Auto shutoff open circuit detection Counter error Fixing motor overcurrent detection Polishing oil removing motor PLL error Holding tray drive motor PLL error Waste toner ...

Page 639: ...Reserved Bk developing motor PLL error C developing motor PLL error M developing motor PLL error Y developing motor PLL error Reserved Reserved Reserved Buffer unit cover open closed Paped deck cover open closed Control key Front cover open closed Pick up assembly cover open closed Reserved Reserved Buffer unit connection Paper deck connection Transfer unit connection Holding tray unit connection ...

Page 640: ...r PS21 Registration paper sensor PS1 Holding tray pre feeding sensor 2 PS9 Holding tray pre feeding sensor 1 PS8 Holding tray paper sensor 2 PS31 Holding tray paper sensor 1 PS30 Delivery sensor PS34 jam detection Internal delivery sensor PS35 jam detection Separation sensor PS15 jam detection Registration rear paper sensor PS14 jam detection Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Delivery vertical p...

Page 641: ...24 A8 J2224 A7 J2222 B11 J2222 B8 J2207 B4 J2207 B13 J2207 B12 Description Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Cassette 2 paper length sensor 1 PS104 Cassette 2 paper length sensor 2 PS103 Cassette 1 paper length sensor 1 PS102 Cassette 1 paper length sensor 2 PS101 Reserved Duplexing unit stacking guide home position sensor PS29 Paper deck lifter lower switch SW8002 Paper deck lifter upper limit ...

Page 642: ...09 A14 J2209 A12 J2223 B10 J2218 A8 Description For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Bk toner level sensor upper TS4 C toner level sensor TS3 M toner level sensor TS2 Y toner level sensor TS1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Upper fixing web length sensor PS36 Fixing oil level sensor OS1 Waste toner l...

Page 643: ...ransfer belt lifter sensor 2 PS13 Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 PS12 Pattern reading CCD shutter rear Pattern reading CCD shutter front For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory Remarks While in rotation alternately 1 and 0 Detected 1 Detected 1 Detected 1 Detected 0 Detect...

Page 644: ...ss 803000H 803001H 803002H NO7 Description Reserved Reserved Video controller reset Auto shut off Reserved Reserved DC power supply ready For factory Reserved Reserved Environment sensor EV1 Night power switching For factory For factory For factory For factory Waste toner feeding motor ON Transfer belt motor ON Scanner motor ON Drum motor ON Pick up motor ON For factory Fixing motor speed switchin...

Page 645: ...eloping motor ON Reserved Polishing roller solenoid ON Transfer belt cleaning web motor ON Transfer belt lifter clutch ON Polishing oil removing motor rotation direction Polishing oil removing motor ON Transfer cleaning blade solenoid OFF Transfer cleaning blade solenoid ON Bk transfer blade solenoid OFF Bk transfer blade solenoid ON C transfer blade solenoid OFF C transfer blade solenoid ON M tra...

Page 646: ...otor C primary wire cleaner motor M primary wire cleaner motor M primary wire cleaner motor Y primary wire cleaner motor Y primary wire cleaner motor Separation wire cleaner motor Separation wire cleaner motor Hopper sensor select Bk toner supply clutch lower Bk toner supply clutch upper C toner supply clutch M toner supply clutch Y toner supply clutch Reserved Reserved Reserved Separation claw re...

Page 647: ...ensor LED ON Y SALT sensor LED ON Delivery fan speed switching Reserved Lower delivery fan ON Delivery cooling fan ON Pre fixing feeding suction fan ON Primary exhaust fan ON Primary suction fan ON Laser cooling fan Remarks ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 Low speed 1 High speed 0 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 A1 4 A7 10 A2 5 A8 11 A6 13 B8 B3 B6 A15 B2 5 ...

Page 648: ... pick up roller releasing solenoid ON Multifeeder pick up releasing solenoid ON Cassette 2 pick up roller releasing solenoid ON Cassette 1 pick up roller releasing solenoid ON Reserved Duplexing assembly pick up clutch ON Paper deck feeding clutch ON Paper deck pick up clutch ON Multifeeder feeding clutch ON Multifeeder pick up clutch ON Cassette 2 pick up clutch ON Cassette 1 pick up clutch ON Pi...

Page 649: ...it paper deflecting solenoid S ON Duplexing unit paper deflecting plate solenoid R ON Duplexing unit paper deflecting plate solenoid L ON Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid ON Duplexing unit feeding motor ON Reversal drive clutch ON Stopper plate solenoid DOWN Stopper plate solenoid UP Pattern reading CCD shutter open Pattern reading CCD shutter closed Bk image position correcting mirror rat...

Page 650: ... B9 J2212 B8 J2237 5 J2237 3 J2237 1 Description Reserved Reserved Total copy counter 6 Total copy counter 5 Total copy counter 4 Total copy counter 3 Total copy counter 2 Total copy counter 1 For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory 2nd bit in counter mode 1st bit in counter mode 0th...

Page 651: ...2H 807004H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Connector Description For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory Remarks ...

Page 652: ...itching clutch CL1 ON Buffer path home position select Locking cam switching solenoid 2 SL2 ON Locking cam switching solenoid 1 SL1 ON Buffer path unit enable Buffer path motor M1 Transfer separation pre fixing high voltage enable Anti stray toner high voltage ON Blank pulse enable Separation AC bias ON Bk primary bias ON C primary bias ON M primary bias ON Y primary bias ON Bk developing bias DC ...

Page 653: ... x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Item JAM CLR Description Clear all jam histories A B C D E F Ja...

Page 654: ...ow order 2 digits Registration paper sensor Pick up vertical path 1 sensor Pick up vertical path 2 sensor Pick up vertical path 3 sensor Registration rear sensor Separation sensor Internal delivery sensor Delivery sensor Buffer pass paper sensor Sorter Delivery vertical path sensor Delivery vertical path sensor 2 Duplexing unit reversal sensor Holding tray front feeding sensor 1 Holding tray front...

Page 655: ...Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx HIST 9 Exxx Exxx HIST 4 Exxx M S R P F COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION DISP TEST READY READY E070 E075 E194 E260 E000 E004 E013 E020 E023 E040 E041 E050 E061 E062 Item CODE E000 E012 E020 E030 E040 E061 E072 E073 HIST 0 Description Indicates the appropriate error code E for the results of self diagnosis Indicates detail codes for each error code See the descriptions on sel...

Page 656: ...s that the tray is moving Indicates an error in the mechanism that moves the tray Indicates a tray home position error Indicates that the tray is moving local Indicates the position of the tray Indicates that the lens is moving Indicates the state of motor excitation Indicates the position of the lens Indicates an open circuit in the lamp Indicates that initialization is under way Indicates local ...

Page 657: ... 2 STATUS 3 STATUS 4 xx xx xx xx Description For R D For R D Indicates the error code sent by the RDF controller PCB 01H equivalent of E401 02H equivalent of E402 03H equivalent of E403 04H equivalent of E404 05H equivalent of E405 06H no corresponding error 07H equivalent of E407 11H equivalent of E411 21H equivalent of E400 For R D Indicates the alarm code sent by the RDF controller PCB 01H re c...

Page 658: ...jam 08H cover open jam during feeding 09H cover open jam other than during feeding Indicates the alarm code sent by the sorter controller PCB ALARM 1 02H overstacking ALARM 2 02H staple jam 03H stapler safety mechanism activation 04H stapler overstacking 05Hmixed paper sizes horizontal 07H stapler unit absent 0AH staple absent ALARM 3 4for future use 11 SORT INF SORT state M S R P F DISP ADJUST CO...

Page 659: ...e transfer belt end sensor PS17 front and when it reaches the end sensor 2 PS18 rear F TO B XXXX XXXX XXXX Most recent data Second most recent data Third most recent data Indicates the time required by the transfer belt between when it reaches the transfer belt end sensor 1 PS18 rear and when it leaves the sensor BST XXXX XXXX XXXX Most recent data Second most recent data Third most recent data In...

Page 660: ... B data minus FST data time taken by the belt to move from front to back F TO B C Time XXXX XXXX second most recent third most recent Indicates data B TO F data minus BST data time taken by the belt to move from back to front B TO F C Time XXXX XXXX second most recent third most recent indicates data F TO B data plus B TO F data time taken by the belt to make a round trip Remarks Unit 0 1 sec Unit...

Page 661: ...on correc tion control and display of data related to auto gradation correction control ADJ MNISC adjustments other than above Adjusts the feeding position For R D Use it to set cassette heater operation conditions Fine adjusts transfer high voltage output by condition Fine adjusts separation high voltage output by condition Use it to make fine adjustments for the pre fixing high voltage output ac...

Page 662: ...er home position sensor to the read start position Unit Number of steps of the stepping motor Follow the instructions on the next page Use it to make adjustments so that the image read start position Y direction main scanning direction matches the reference point on the copyboard glass Unit Pixel Follow the instructions on the next page Use it to fine adjust the point at which the standard white p...

Page 663: ...lowing adjust ments 1 Before starting service mode turn OFF the original detection mechanism 2 Select the ADJ XY screen and press the Start key The appropriate copying modes will be set au tomatically and a copy will be made with a shift of about 20 mm as shown in Figure 7 704 3 If any part of the image is missing decrease the values of ADJ X and ADJ Y 4 If an area outside the image is copied incr...

Page 664: ... may enter any value as the slice level for original detection A higher value increases detection capability but tends to lead to wrong detection DS DOC When detecting ordinary originals DS PRJ When detecting the projection area with the projector in use DS OHP When detecting film 6x6 8x10 placed on the copyboard glass with the projector in use from the position of the reference sheet Remarks Sett...

Page 665: ... projector in use or if original detec tion fails when the original detection mechanism is on YE YS XE XS On copyboard glass YS YE XE XS On paper Remarks Settings 300 300 19 0 19 0mm Ref 0 For XS XE Unit 0 11 mm approx For YS YE Unit 0 06 mm approx 3 PROJ projector area adjustment M S R P F DISP FUNC COUNTER OPTION TEST xxxx ADJUST PJRD XS xxxx PJDA XS xxxx PJRD XE xxxx PJDA XE xxxx PJCAR X xxxx P...

Page 666: ...ginal detection mechanism is off in copyboard mode The area for the standard value 0 is 5 mm inside the Fresnel lens Use it to adjust the film reading range when the original detection mechanism is off with the auto changer in use Remarks Settings 99 99 YS YE 6 3 6 3mm Unit 0 06mm approx XS XE 10 9 10 9mm Unit 0 11mm approx on copyboard glass Standard 0 Settings 100 to 100 Standard 0 REF PJDA affe...

Page 667: ...rted values EDADJ Y EDADJ X Changes the processing method used to read images into memory for coloring in area specification color creation If the value is increased filling gaps will be easier too high a value however will result in bleeding If the slice level adjustment value is increased for binarization used for reading images into memory for area specification color creation finer lines may b...

Page 668: ...ory for freehand point specifi cation If the value is increased filling gaps will be easier Adjusts the slice level for binarization used for reading images into memory for freehand point specification If the value is increased finer lines may be read Remarks Settings 0 3 Standard 0 Settings 0 255 Standard 128 Note 1 You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced a PCB or initiali...

Page 669: ...he RDF tray RY For correction in main scanning direction when pick up is from the RDF tray If RY 0 initial value the CCD starts read ing at a point 2 mm away from the index for A4 and 11 mm away from the index for LTR DX For correction in sub scanning direction when pick up is from the manual feeding tray feeding assembly DY For correction in main scanning direction when pick up is from the manual...

Page 670: ... M C K Description Indicates the present value of the target contrast potential Indicates the present value of de fogging potential Remarks 5 V CONT photosensitive drum surface potential contrast adjustment M S R P F DISP FUNC COUNTER OPTION TEST ADJUST VCONT Y xxxx VBACK Y xxxx VCONT M xxxx VBACK M xxxx VCONT C xxxx VBACK C xxxx VCONT K xxxx VBACK K xxxx V CONT READY READY ...

Page 671: ...outputs against professionally offset printed material if the print out is lighter increase the setting of P TBL M C Y K if the print out is darker decrease the setting of P TBL M C Y K Gray Hue Correction Mode If greenish or bluish increase the setting If magenta is too strong decrease the setting Remarks Settings 8 8 Standard 0 Darker Lighter Settings 16 16 Standard Y 0 M 0 C 0 K 0 Settings 3 to...

Page 672: ...n correction is ex ecuted against the design value Indicates the control value obtained from M Y K DMAX used to determine contrast potential Remarks Set it to 0 when adjusting images otherwise be sure to set it to 1 Standard 1 Optimum value 75 or higher 7 PASCAL auto gradation correction control M S R P F M S R P F FUNC FUNC DISP ADJUST COUNTER OPTION TEST DISP ADJUST COUNTER OPTION TEST Y DMAX PA...

Page 673: ...ervice label once again if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB since initialization returns it to the standard value Remarks Standard 1 Standard 1 Set to optimum value at time of shipment recorded on the service label Standard 0 Settings 20 to 20 Darker Lighter REF If the value of M C Y or K DMAX is lower than 75 a fault may be assumed in the devel opment process of the color in ...

Page 674: ...e adjusts the separation level between text and photo in text photo mode or text halide mode Identifies photos better Identifies text better This mode corrects text photo setting of user mode Use it to correct the black text correction ACS level A higher setting makes black text darker in 4 color text photo mode For ACS evaluation black will be identi fied more readily Use it to correct the target...

Page 675: ...CCD 6 to 6 Item ACS ADJ Description ACS identification Level Adjustment Mode A higher setting will increase the area in which color is identified as being non chromatic A lower setting will increase the area in which color is identified as being chromatic Note 1 The value will return to the standard value when the RAM is initialized requiring re input Be sure to record any new value on the service...

Page 676: ...ltifeeder Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction when pick up is from the paper deck Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction for re pick up operation Adjusts the image write start position in sub scanning direction Remarks A higher value leads to a movement to the rear Feeding direction Image Rear Front Unit 0 11 mm Standard 128 Settings 0 to 25...

Page 677: ...ailing edge of the images Use it to adjust the degree of arching paper at the rear of the registration roller paper stop timing A higher setting will increase the arching Too low a setting can cause skew movement Adjusting the Pickup Timing with LTR Selected for the Paper Deck adding the OFF timing of the pickup clutch If a discrepancy occurs along the leading edge margin among LTR sheets change t...

Page 678: ...ODY g ENV A G OFF Description Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g measured by the environment sensor Indicates the present environment Sets ON OFF of the cassette heater Sets to OFF for all environment Remarks Same as the read...

Page 679: ...onment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g measured by the environment sensor Adjusts the transfer high voltage output Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g in the three ranges of A through C Remarks Same as the reading under DISPLAY ANA LOG Settings 5 to 5 Unit 1 0 µA Standard...

Page 680: ... mode and in addition when copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in OHP mode Effective during image position correction control Effective in thick paper mode and in addition copying on a one sided copy or on the 1st side of a two sided copy Effective in thick paper mode and in addition copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in extra thick paper mode and in addition w...

Page 681: ...ription Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g measured by the environment sensor Adjusts the transfer high voltage output Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g in the three ranges of A through C Remarks Same a...

Page 682: ...n copying on a one sided copy or on the 1st side of a two sided copy Effective in thick paper mode and in addition copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in extra thick paper mode and in addition when copying on the 1st side of a two sided copy Effective in extra thick paper mode and in addition when copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in special paper 1 mode and i...

Page 683: ...gs 1 to 9 Item BODY C BODY BODY g FS OFST NOTE 1 ZONE A B C STMT MD Description Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g measured by the environment sensor Adjusts the transfer high voltage output Indicates the machine internal hum...

Page 684: ...mode and in addition copying on a one sided copy or on the 1st side of a two sided copy Effective in thick paper mode and in addition copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in extra thick paper mode and in addition when copying on the 1st side of a two sided copy Effective in extra thick paper mode and in addition when copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in special...

Page 685: ...A B C Description Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g measured by the environment sensor Adjusts the transfer high voltage output Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value g in the three ranges of A through C Rema...

Page 686: ...ion copying on a one sided copy or on the 1st side of a two sided copy Effective in thick paper mode and in addition copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in extra thick paper mode and in addition when copying on the 1st side of a two sided copy Effective in extra thick paper mode and in addition when copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Effective in special paper 1 mode and...

Page 687: ...DE FUSER CST AD F MISCs F MISCp TCLN P THICK IMG REG INSTALL for installation Reader controller PCB related adjustment DC controller PCB related adjustment CCD related adjustment Projector related adjustment Laser adjustment Pick up timing adjustment Retention point adjustment Photosensitive drum potential measurement Transfer blade transfer belt cleaning blade operation Fixing assembly related ad...

Page 688: ... M C K SINIT 4 Description Use it to read in the initial value of the toner density signal SGNL REF of the specified color The value will be indicated on screen 3 4 Record it to the service label Reads the initial value of the toner density signal SGNL REF of three colors Y M C in sequence The value will be indicated on screen 3 4 Record it to the service label Reads the initial value of the toner...

Page 689: ...the screen or less 2 Replace the Bk developer See chapter 7 II Stand ards and Adjustment E 1 Replacing the Developer however do not execute auto gradation correction as yet 3 Execute FUNC INSTALL 2nd page NLSET K in service mode about 1 min 4 Check to make sure that PASCAL in ADJUST PASCAL in service mode is 1 5 Execute auto gradation correction in user mode Executes auto correction of the read in...

Page 690: ... C Description Indicates the value of the toner density signal when INIT is executed as ATR control Be sure to record the reading on the label Figure 7 702 Indicates the value of the toner density reference signal when INIT is executed as ATR control Be sure to record the reading on the label Figure 7 702 Indicates the gain value gain value used to set SGNL M SGNL C SGNL Y to 818 for the toner den...

Page 691: ...LL xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx Item SGNL S Y M C K REF S Y M C K SGNL D Y M C K SIGG S Y M C K Remarks Description Indicates the value of the SALT signal Be sure to record the reading on the label Figure 7 702 Indicates the value of the SALT reference signal Be sure to record the reading Figure 7 702 Indicates the value of the light reflected by the photo sensit...

Page 692: ...lue Starts a check of the ROM on the reader controller PCB i e totals the RAM data Indicates the check sum value of Q1301 on the reader controller PCB Indicates the check sum value of Q1305 on the reader controller PCB Indicates the check sum value of Q1308 on the reader controller PCB Indicates the check sum value of Q1312 on the reader controller PCB Indicates the check sum value of Q1315 on the...

Page 693: ...ears the RAM on the DC controller PCB and sets the standard value Starts a check of the ROM on the DC controller PCB i e totals the data in RAM Indicates the check sum value of Q2341 on the DC controller PCB Indicates the check sum value of Q2340 on the DC controller PCB Remarks The contents of the RAM will not be replaced with the initial settings until the CPU on the DC controller PCB is powered...

Page 694: ...MR LOW A4R LOW STMR MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 Description Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 1 Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 1 Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 2 Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 2 ...

Page 695: ...ADY 3 5 n Entering Backup Data If you have executed RAM CLR for the DC controller PCB use this screen to enter the data recorded on the label shown in Figure 7 702 Item SGNL Y M C REF Y M C SIGGY M C Description Enters the value of the toner density signal when INIT is executed as ATR control Enters the value of the toner density reference signal when INIT is executed as ATR control Enters the val...

Page 696: ...4 5 n Entering Backup Data If you have executed RAM CLR for the DC controller PCB use this screen to enter the data recorded on the label shown in Figure 7 702 Item SGNL S Y M C K REF S Y M C K SGNL D Y M C K SIGG S Y M C K PT OFST K PUDT U L Description Use it to enter the value of the SALT signal Use it to enter the value of the SALT reference signal Use it to enter the value of the signal repre...

Page 697: ...r PCB use this screen to enter the data recorded on the label shown in Figure 7 702 Item P TH 1 2 SNSR RNK Y C K OFST POTOFSTYY M C K Description Enters the output characteristics of the paper thickness sensor set at time of shipment from the factory Enters the characteristics A to E of the paper thick ness sensor to be installed newly Use it to enter the offset value for the image position correc...

Page 698: ...ustment The bar code data recorded on the standard white plate is read and offset adjustment intensity adjustment for the scanning lamp and gain adjustment are executed in sequence The display changes as follows R RADY Bar code OeAdj Offdj LampAdj GainAdj OeAdj InitBAdj Gz bar Use it to indicate the level adjustment value of the scanning lamp Use it to display the shading adjustment correction val...

Page 699: ...es the data for blue of the balance level Indicates the data for green of the balance level Indicates the data for red of the balance level Indicates the value for gain level adjustment of the CCD Indicates the data for blue of the gain level Indicates the data for green of the gain level Indicates the data for red of the gain level Use it to display the modes selected in user mode 0 normal mode s...

Page 700: ...r 1 min A press on the PRJ LAMP key turns it off Adjusts the gain for the CCD and reads the appropriate data for installation work Adjusts the target value for shading when making copies of negative film using the film projector A higher value will make the images darker B Y G M R C Adjusts the target value for shading correction when making copies of positive film using the film projector A lower...

Page 701: ...WER 0 400 P00 0 400 PFF 0 BIAS K 0 LASER Y LASER M LASER K READY 1 4 2 4 4 4 FUNC Item 1 2POWER POWER BIAS Y M C K 400 P00 Y M C K 200 P00 M C K 266 P00 Y K 400 PFF Y M C K 200 PFF M C K 266 PFF Y K Description Turns ON the laser output for laser power minimum value adjustment Turns ON the laser output for laser power maximum value adjustment Turns ON the laser output for laser power bias value ad...

Page 702: ... the pick up timing adjustment value Be sure to place A4 or LTR paper in the upper and lower cassettes before executing the operation Use it to indicate the data obtained by PK ADJ U L D Use it to indicate the maximum value of the data obtained by PK AJD U L D Use it to write the obtained data into memory Use it to execute skew removing operation twice when pick up is from the multifeeder tray eff...

Page 703: ...ADJUST COUNTER OPTION TEST 0 ATT ON 0 ATTRACT FUNC Item ATT SLCT ATT ON Description Selects the source of paper for checking the point of retention Starts operations according to the settings under ATT SLCT and stops automatically with paper retained on the transfer belt Remarks Use A4 LTR paper for the mode Source of paper Upper cassette Lower cassette Paper deck Multifeeder Duplexing pick up ass...

Page 704: ...oto sensitive drum Indicates the offset value for the potential sen sor Executes offset adjustment on the potential measurement circuit of the photosensitive drum Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of the primary charging assembly is 300 V and the laser output is V00 Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of th...

Page 705: ...N TEST 0 0 M S R P F Item BLD SLCT BLD ON Remarks Description Use it to determine the combination of ways to operate the transfer blade and the transfer belt cleaning blade Press BLD SLCT enter a number on the keypad and press the OK key Starts operation according to the settings under BLD SLCT In 10 sec the blade will take off contact position 1 2 3 Transfer blade In contact Off contact In contac...

Page 706: ...ower switch after execution Clears E005 Be sure to turn off and then on the power switch after execution Use it to adjust the fixing temperature value upper roller If you have replaced the fixing assembly enter the value recorded on the label attached to the fixing assembly Thereafter be sure to turn off and then on the power switch Use it to adjust the fixing temperature value lower roller If you...

Page 707: ...MR MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 Description Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 1 Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 1 Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 2 Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 2 Executes auto...

Page 708: ... the LED Starts an activation check on the LCD The notation becomes highlighted Starts an input check on the key See the detail for KEY CHK Ends the input check on the key Starts a check on the scanner Each press on SC MOVED changes the notatio n and the operation as follows Starts a check on the scanning lamp Each press on LAMP ON changes the notation and the operation as follows Reserved Reserve...

Page 709: ...EY CHK Key name indicated on the panel 0 9 RESET STOP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O START STAND BY INTERRUPT CLEAR ID CALL Key 0 to 9 Reset Stop Two Sided One Touch Adjust Color Adjust Extended Zoom Frame Erase Color Create Page Separate Shift Image Create Freehand Area Select Synthesize User Mode Cover Transparency Insert Start Pre Heat Interrupt Clear ID Call ...

Page 710: ...eck on the high voltage output Enter a number on the keypad and press the OK key Use it to start a check on the high voltage output Press the Stop key to stop operation Use it to select the type of check on the motor Enter a number on the keypad and press the OK key Use it to start a check on the motor Press the Stop key to stop the operation Use it to select the type of check on the fan Enter a n...

Page 711: ...he buffer path 1 0 mm 2 0 7 mm 3 1 2 mm Enter a number on the keypad and press the OK key Use it to drive the buffer path motor and the solenoid thereby moving the cam to the position selected under BUFF Be sure to set BUFF 1 and execute BUFF ON after the check Use it to clear E075 After execution check to make sure that the transfer belt is at the correct position then turn off and then on the po...

Page 712: ...er deck 2 pick up roller releasing solenoid SL8001 Duplexing unit pick up roller releasing sole noid SL8 Feeding roller solenoid SL13 Cassette 1 pick up clutch CL12 Cassette 2 pick up clutch CL14 Multifeeder pick up clutch CL6 No 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Parts name Multifeeder feeding clutch CL7 Paper deck pick up clutch CL8001 Paper deck feeding c...

Page 713: ...re exposure OFF photosensitive drum motor OFF Transfer lifter DOWN photosensitive drum motor ON pre exposure ON primary M output grid M output 500 V auxiliary high voltage output M 350 µA developing bias MDC 370 V output ON Waits for a stop command or 60 sec Primary M output grid M output 500 V auxil iary high voltage output M 350 µA developing bias MDC 370 V output OFF pre exposure OFF photosensi...

Page 714: ... M AC DC output anti stray toner high voltage output ON Waits for a stop command or 60 sec Developing bias M AC DC output anti stray toner high voltage output OFF Developing bias C AC DC output anti stray toner high voltage output ON Waits for a stop command or 60 sec Developing bias C AC DC output anti stray toner high voltage output OFF Developing bias K AC DC output anti stray toner high voltag...

Page 715: ...tandard speed 138 mm sec for plain paper 64 to 104 g for 10 sec at standard speed 90 mm sec for thick paper 157 g for 10 sec at standard speed 68 mm sec for ultra thick paper 209 g for 10 sec at gloss speed 45 mm sec for extra thick paper 209 g and stops for 3 sec Operates for an equivalent of 2 rotations of the belt and stops for 3 sec then operates for an equivalent of 2 rotations and stops Rota...

Page 716: ...d then stops Rotates CW for a single full turn rotates CCW for a single turn and then stops Rotates CW for a single full turn rotates CCW for a single turn and then stops Rotates CW for a single full turn rotates CCW for a single turn and then stops Executes home position detection stops for 3 sec moves to A4 position stops for 3 sec moves to B4 position stops for 3 sec moves to A4R position stops...

Page 717: ...an FM7 low speed rotation Delivery assembly cooling fans FM1 2 FM2 3 FM3 high speed rotation Delivery assembly cooling fan 1 FM1 2 FM2 3 FM3 low speed rotation Delivery lower cooling fan 1 FM19 2 FM20 Control On for 5 sec off for 5 sec then remains on continuously ON for 5 sec off for 5 sec then on for 5 sec and stops On for 5 sec off for 5 sec then on for 5 sec and stops On for 5 sec off for 5 se...

Page 718: ... READY Item KCLN OCLN Description Use it to bring the polishing roller in contact while moving the transfer belt The operation will stop after last rotating sequence for about 4 min During operation the notation is P SERVICE Butts the oil removing roller against the transfer belt and rotates both the transfer belt and the oil removing roller for about 4 min During operation the notation is P SERVI...

Page 719: ...ment M S R P F DISP ADJUST COUNTER FUNC PTH DATA P TH 2 XXXX XXXX OPTION TEST A SNSR RNK P THICK READY Item P TH 1 2 SNSR RNK Description Indicates the output characteristics of the paper thickness sensor set at time of shipment from the factory Enters the characteristics A through E of the paper thickness sensor to be installed newly Remarks Values A through E change by toggle opera tion ...

Page 720: ...n of writing the pattern for M F Front R Rear Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y C K rough adjustment in main scanning direction Do not use this item unless E194 is indicated error that disables image position correction Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y C K fine adjustment in main scanning direction Use it to correct the write start posit...

Page 721: ...00 corresponds to 8 sets of patterns 0000 indicates the absence of an error if an error is found in all 8 sets E194 will be indicated If any of the sets is 0000 its data will be used for correction 0 0 1 6 A set 1 through set 8 Y pattern M pattern C pattern Bk pattern 4 bit data is assigned to each color data and a 1 is assigned where an error exists 0 0 1 6 A 0 1 1 0 front main scanning front sub...

Page 722: ...P F DISP ADJUST FUNC R OPT P OPT DECK DATA CON REMOTE COUNTER OPTION TEST READY READY 1 2 3 4 5 R OPT P OPT REMOTE DECK DATA CON Selects reader related machine settings Adjusts the cleaning mode transfer drum stop position Sets conditions for connection with an external controller Sets conditions for connection with a paper deck Use it to disconnect the copy Data Controller A1 ...

Page 723: ... 0 Disable auto start 1 Enable auto start Use it to bring the hues closer to those of profes sional printing 1 Standard 0 Professional printing If MANAGE is set to 1 the Pro Print key will be indicated on the user mode screen Use it to change the range of sampling of the data representing the color selected on an original for color conversion 0 sample selected color in area of 2x2 1 sample selecte...

Page 724: ...to execute recovery without moving the scanner for recovery copying after the presence of a jam or the absence of toner oil paper has been identified 0 normal operation 1 no re scanning during recovery copying Conditions RDF not used page separation not used auto vertical horizontal rotation not used double sided copying not used enlargement page separation not used reduced image page composition ...

Page 725: ... set to 100 the counter 3 will start to count in response to a press on the Start key as long as the copy count is set to 100 or lower Use it to delay the timing at which the sheet of paper is picked up to prevent lines in main scanning direction near 188mm from leading edge of paper 0 normal operation 1 delay pickup timing REF The potential on the transfer belt is not staple when the first copy i...

Page 726: ... state after execu tion B Use it to specify whether copying modes set in local state should be maintained when moving from local state to remote state Use it to enable printing on free size paper from the PS XJ1000 If set to 1 printing on free size paper is ena bled Remarks Settings 0 7 Standard 0 Standard 0 n Details of Settings Setting REMOTE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A Keep as Call key Keep as Call key U...

Page 727: ... as follows Remarks Standard 1 Standard A4 Note 1 You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced the reader controller PCB or initial ized a RAM record any new values on the service label for this purpose 5 DATA CON disconnecting the Copy Data Controller A1 M S R P F DISP ADJUST FUNC B CLR COUNTER OPTION 0 TEST DATA CON READY READY USER Item B CLR Description Connecting the Copy D...

Page 728: ...S Y COUNTER OPTION 0 0 0 xxx THRU DENS M xxx TYPE COLOR Y 0 0 0 COLOR M COLOR C 0 COLOR K DENS C xxx DENS K xxx TEST PG READY READY Item TXPH THRU Description Switches between text mode and photo mode 0 Text mode 1 Photo mode 2 Auto switching Not valid if TYPE is set to 6 grid Switches the gate array of the laser controller PCB Not valid if TYPE is set to 5 halftone 0 Use gate array 1 Do not use g...

Page 729: ...D For R D MCYK horizontal stripe For R D For R D For R D Full color 17 gradations For R D Not used For R D For R D For R D For R D For R D For R D Remarks Enter the appropriate number 1 through 16 using the keypad and press the Start key to generate test prints In the case of 3 4 5 or 6 the color may be selected in color mode user mode Be sure to return the setting to 0 after generating the test p...

Page 730: ... 035 036 037 038 039 040 021 022 After 999999 the reading returns to 000000 When a Level 3 item except 038 039 040 is pressed and the Clear key is pressed after the item has been highlighted the counter reading of the item will return to 000000 Check the value of Level 3 item 038 whenever you have replaced the cleaning web of the fixing assem bly If not 0 press E005 RLS under FUSER of FUNC to clea...

Page 731: ...cates the number of sheets picked up from cassette 1 Indicates the number of sheets picked up from cassette 2 Indicates the number of sheets picked up from Paper deck Indicates the number of sheets picked up from the multifeeder Indicates the number of sheets picked up from the duplexing unit Indicates the number of scans made by the scanner Item 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033...

Page 732: ...the presence of an er ror upon detection Code E000 Cause See the descriptions that follow Fixing thermistor short circuit Triac short circuit DC controller PCB faulty Fixing thermistor poor contact open circuit Fixing heater open circuit Triac faulty DC controller PCB faulty Description xx represents the heater xx 01 upper heater xx 02 lower heater xx01 The overheating detection circuit on the DC ...

Page 733: ...C controller PCB has turned OFF the triac drive signal for the drum heater The cleaning web solenoid has turned ON 270 times after the web length sensor detected the lever 0001 The fixing drawer connector connec tion signal CONNECT goes 0 when the front cover is closed i e the drawer connector is disconnected 0002 The fixing lever switch signal F KBLK goes 1 when the front cover is closed i e the ...

Page 734: ...ly faulty Stray light to sensor no cover front cover open Photosensitive drum deteriora tion Description Toner Density Fault xx represents the color for the developing assembly xx 01 Y xx 02 M xx 03 C xx 04 Bk The notations in the descriptions are as follows SGNL toner density signal REF reference signal xx3A The variation of the following is 47 or more for 5 samplings of the density data when sam...

Page 735: ... sampling of the following values is 848 or higher REF S Y REF S M REF S C REF S K or the value of REF S K is 544 or higher xx42 When setting initial data upon installa tion for example the value of the following is 255 SIGG S Y SIGG S M SIGG S C SIGG S K xx43 When setting initial data upon installa tion for example the gain of the SALT reference signal for each color is 255 xx45 When setting init...

Page 736: ...f the following values is 848 or higher or the value of REF S K is 544 or higher xx4C During copying sequence the average value after sampling of the following values is 512 or lower SGNL S Y SGNL S M SGNL S C or the value of SGNL S K is 102 or lower xx4D During copying sequence the average value after sampling of the following values is 336 or lower REF S Y REF S M REF S C or the value of REF S K...

Page 737: ...g copying sequence the initial setting for the following is 512 or lower because of an error in the memory back up data SGNL S Y SGNL S M SGNL S C or the value of SGNL S K is 144 or lower xx86 During copying sequence the initial setting of the following is 336 or lower because of an error in the memory back up data REF S Y REF S M REF S C or the value of REF S K is 464 or lower xx87 During copying...

Page 738: ... During copying sequence the variation in 5 samplings of the following values is 47 or higher REF Y REF M REF C xxB0 When setting initial data the average after sampling of the following values is 859 or higher SGNL Y SGNL M SGNL C xxB1 When setting initial data the average after sampling of the following values is 859 or higher REF Y REF M REF C xxB2 When setting initial data the average after sa...

Page 739: ...e of the following is 30 or more higher than the initial setting REF Y REF M REF C xxBC During copying sequence the average of the following values after sampling is 306 or higher SGNL Y SGNL M SGNL C xxBD During copying sequence the value of the following is 30 or more lower than the initial setting REF Y REF M REF C xxBF When setting initial data the values of the following cannot be set SIGG Y ...

Page 740: ... 0201 The rotation speed of the M developing assembly M18M has deviated from a specific value for 0 1 sec or more PLL signal 0 0301 The rotation speed of the C developing motor M18C has deviated from a specific value for 0 1 sec or more PLL signal 0 0401 The rotation speed of the Bk develop ing motor M18Bk has deviated from a specific speed for 0 1 sec or more PLL signal 0 Check immediately before...

Page 741: ... 6 sec after the multifeeder lifter motor M1 has turned ON 0102 The lower lifter sensor PS3 does not turn ON within 6 sec after the multifeeder lifter motor M1 has turned ON 0001 The paper deck lifter upper limit switch SW8001 does not turn on within 40 sec after the paper deck motor SM8001 has turned ON 0002 The paper deck lifter lower switch SW8002 does not turn on within 40 sec after the paper ...

Page 742: ...s 30 V or more xx02 The difference between VD2 measured during the 1st rotation and VD2 meas ured during the 2nd rotation is 30 V or more xx03 The difference between VL1 measured during the 1st rotation and VL1 meas ured during the 2nd rotation is 30 V or more xx04 The difference between VL2 measured during the 1st rotation and VL2 meas ured during the 2nd rotation is 30 V or more xx10 The measure...

Page 743: ... addition the measurement of VD1 is 200 V or more The difference between VD2 and VL2 measurements is 200 V or less and in addition the VD2 measurement is 600 V or higher xx17 The VL1 measurement is 200 V or higher and in addition the VL2 meas urement is 400 V or higher xx21 The computation value of Vdc is the upper limit value 750 V or higher xx22 The computation value of Vg is the upper limit val...

Page 744: ...drum poor grounding Description xx30 The measurement of VD1 is 400 V or higher xx31 The measurement of VD1 is 200 V or lower xx32 The measurement of VD2 is 800 V or higher xx33 The measurement of VD2 is 500 V or lower xx34 The measurement of VL1 is 200 V or higher xx35 The measurement of VL2 is 400 V or more xx36 The measurement of VL2 is 0 V or lower xx50 The difference between the computation va...

Page 745: ...t does not change after a specific period of time 6 sec 0001 The connect signal CONNECT of the transfer assembly frame goes 0 when the front cover is closed 0002 The transfer belt end sensor 4 PS20 and the transfer belt end sensor 1 PS17 detected the belt at the same time 0003 The transfer belt end sensor 3 PS19 and the transfer belt end sensor 2 PS18 detected the belt at the same time 0004 The tr...

Page 746: ...tion sensor PS10 to detect a rotation fault xx01 At the start of potential control the BD signal is not detected for 1 sec or more xx02 The operation ON current used to obtain optimum intensity is larger than a specific value The rotation speed of the motor has deviated from a specific value for 0 1 sec or more Code E074 E075 E076 E100 E110 Cause Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 PS12 2 PS13 Pick up m...

Page 747: ...h has detected overheating of the 5V system on the DC power supply PCB 0004 The thermal switch has detected overheating in the 24VR system on the DC power supply PCB 0005 The thermal switch has detected overheating in the 24VU system on the DC power supply PCB 0006 The DC power supply cooling fan is not rotating normally During the first copying operation after the power switch has been turned ON ...

Page 748: ...aulty Description Communication with the copier is monitored at all times The communication is disrupted for 5 sec or more The sensor state does not change even after the pick up motor has been driven for more than 2 sec The number of belt motor clock pulses is less than a specific value for 100 ms The number of slip clock pulses is below a specific value for 100 ms The number of delivery motor cl...

Page 749: ...02 The buffer sensor 2 does not detect the position of the locking cam at the correct timing i e the sensor 2 may be considered to be damaged the sensor 1 operates normally 0003 The buffer sensor 1 2 does not detect the position of the locking cam at the correct timing i e the sensor 1 2 or the locking solenoid 1 2 may be considered to be damaged 0004 The buffer sensor 1 2 does not detect the posi...

Page 750: ... occurred in the auto adjustment value The operation does not end within a specific time after the motor drive signal has been generated 5000 ms if front retrieval and generated and 2000 ms otherwise The operation does not end within 2000 ms after the motor drive signal has been gener ated There is no clock signal from the clock sensor PI8 of the motor for 250 ms or more The input signal from the ...

Page 751: ... PCB faulty Power switch DC controller PCB DC harness Power supply unit DCP1 cooling fan error Description The communication between the IP ED PCB and the IP MAIN PCB is interrupted for 5 sec or more The communication between the IP MAIN PCB and the film projector is interrupted for 5 sec or more See the Service Manual for the film projector The communication between the DC controller PCB and the ...

Page 752: ... FUNC in service mode 3 Even after clearing the E indication by turning off the power switch a description of the last E indication may be checked using JAM ER ROR under DISPLAY in service mode REF Clearing E000 1 Start service mode and select FUSER under FUNC 2 Press E000 RLS 3 Turn off and then on the power switch Clearing E005 1 Start service mode and select FUSER under FUNC 2 Press E005 RLS 3 ...

Page 753: ...PRIME AU JAPON APPENDIX A GENERAL TIMING CHART A 1 B SIGNALS AND ABBRIVIATIONS A 3 C GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 11 D DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 15 E READER CONTROLLER PCB A 51 F CCD DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 66 G HVT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 70 H SPECIAL TOOLS A 82 I SOLVENTS AND OILS A 84 ...

Page 754: ......

Page 755: ...oltage Transfer cleaning blade solenoid SL6 Polishing roller solenoid SL18 Polishing oil removing motor M15 Transfer belt C web motor M12 Transfer belt C web rotation sensor PS10 Transfer belt motor M14 Transfer belt home position sensor PS16 Pre exposure lamp LA1 2 3 4 Primary charging assembly high voltage Pre primary charging assembly high voltage Photosensitive drum motor M21 Separation chargi...

Page 756: ...charging assembly Y high voltage Transfer charging assembly M high voltage Transfer charging assembly C high voltage Transfer charging assembly Bk high voltage Internal static eliminator roller high voltage Transfer cleaning blade solenoid SL6 Polishing roller solenoid SL18 Polishing oil removing motor M15 Transfer belt C web motor M12 Transfer belt C web rotation sensor PS10 Transfer belt motor M...

Page 757: ...LY CLUTCH command CL2D M TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH command CL3D C TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH command CL4D BK TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH UPPER command CL5D BK TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH LOWER command CL6D MULTIFEEDER PICK UP CLUTCH command CL7D PAPER THICKNESS DETECT ROLLER CLUTCH command CL8D REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH command CL10D DUPLEXING UNIT PICK UP ROLLEER CLUTCH command CL11D PICK UP VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 1 CLUTCH co...

Page 758: ...OOLING FAN FM10 13 command FM12D SCANNER COOLING FAN 3 command FM13D SCANNER COOLING FAN 4 command FM19D LOWER DELIVERY UNIT COOLING FAN 1 command FM20D LOWER DELIVERY UNIT COOLING FAN 2 command FRDC FRONT COVER SWITCH signal HVAC C C DEVELOPING BIAS AC command HVAC K BK DEVELOPING BIAS AC command HVAC M M DEVELOPING BIAS AC command HVAC Y Y DEVELOPING BIAS AC command HVACEN DEVELOPING BIAS AC ENA...

Page 759: ...ANNING LAMP ERROR signal LAON SCANNING LAMP ON signal LFLM PAPER DECK LIFTER LOWER LIMIT signal LHON LOWER FIXING HEATER ON command LINT SCANNING LAMP INTENSITY signal LTP PAPER DECK LIFTER UPPER LIMIT command M1CCW MULTIFEEDER LIFTER DOWN command M1CW MULTIFEEDER LIFTER UP command M2 A Y MIRROR ANGLE CORRECTION MOTOR command M2 A Y MIRROR ANGLE CORRECTION MOTOR command M2 B Y MIRROR ANGLE CORRECT...

Page 760: ...nal M15ON POLISHING OIL REMOVING MOTOR signal M15PLL POLISHING OIL REMOVING MOTOR PLL LOCK signal M16ON CASSETE 1 LIFTER MOTOR command M17ON CASSETE 2 LIFTER MOTOR command M18CON C DEVELOPING MOTOR command M18CPLL C DEVELOPING MOTOR PLL LOCK command M18KON BK DEVELOPING MOTOR command M18KPLL BK DEVELOPING MOTOR PLL LOCK command M18MON M DEVELOPING MOTOR command M18MPLL M DEVELOPING MOTOR PLL LOCK ...

Page 761: ...TIFEEDER LIFTER SENSOR signal UPPER PS3DT MULTIFEEDER LIFTER SENSOR signal LOWER PS4DT MULTIFEEDER PAPER SENSOR signal FRONT PS5DT MULTIFEEDER PAPER SENSOR signal REAR PS8DT PRE HOLDING TRAY FEEDER SENSOR 1 signal PS9DT PRE HOLDING TRAY FEEDER SENSOR 2 signal PS10DT TRANSFER BELT CLEANING WEB ROTATION SENSOR signal PS11DT TRANSFER BELT CLEANING WEB LEVEL SENSOR signal PS12DT TRANSFER BELT LIFTER S...

Page 762: ...l SL2D FIXING OIL PUMP SOLENOID command SL3D UPPER FIXING ROLLER CLEANING WEB SOLENOID command SL4D UPPER FIXING ROLLER CLEANING WEB RELEASE SOLENOID command SL5D MULTIFEEDER PICK UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID command SL6DR TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE RELEASE command SL6DS TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE SET command SL7CDR C TRANSFER BLADE RELEASE command SL7CDS C TRANSFER BLADE SET command SL7KDR BK T...

Page 763: ...FEED ROLLER CLUTCH command STMDN PAPER DECK MOTOR MOVE DOWN command STMUP PAPER DECK MOTOR MOVE UP command STPCD PAPER DECK PICK UP ROLLER CLUTCH command STPE PAPER DECK PAPER SENSOR signal TERR L LOWER FIXING HEATER DRIVE TRIAC SHORT CIRCUIT DETECTION signal TERR U UPPER FIXING HEATER DRIVE TRIAC SHORT CIRCUIT DETECTION signal THM1 UPPER FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE signal THM2 LOWER FIXING ROLLER T...

Page 764: ......

Page 765: ...M HVSUBY NVGRY HVPRY 24V GNDR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 24VAN FM8D 1 2 2 1 24VAN FM9D 3 4 2 1 HVPPRC HVGRC HVPRC HVPPRK NVGRK HVPRK 24V GNDR 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 1 HVSUBC HVGRC HVPRC HVSUBK NVGRK HVPRK HVPPRY NVGRY HVPRY HVPPRM HVGRM HVPRM 150V 15V 15V 150V 15V 15V 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 150V 15V 15V 150V 15V 15V 4 5 6 CL16 CL J6148H J6148 J6150F J6150M J6154M SW5 FT11 FT13 FT12 FT14 J614...

Page 766: ......

Page 767: ...17M J6417F FT87 TP4 FT88 H8 FT89 TP3 FT90 H7 J6222F J6317 J6318 J131 J135 J6413M J6413F H N AC N AC H 18W 18Bk ET41 ET42 FT79 FT81 FT83 FT85 FT80 FT82 FT84 FT86 H3 H4 H5 H6 FT67 LA5 FT68 FT69 TP6 FT70 SW2 SW8 CO82 RL1 Main switch Fuser Unit 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1...

Page 768: ...8 9 11 10 12 13 14 15 J6307F J6307M 29 28 6 7 27 20 22 33 32 6 8 30 4 9 4 36 35 31 38 37 15V GND 8V GND 8V GNDR 5V GNDR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GND 24V GND 5V 49 45 100 98 1 2 3 4 24V 24V GND GND 2 35 5 39 1 2 3 4 GND 24V 47 43 1 2 GND 24V 17 15 GND 24V 50 46 1 2 1 2 1 2 GND 24V 40 36 1 2 1 2 1 2 J6364M J6364F J6362M J6362F GND 24V 41 37 1 2 1 2 1 2 J6363M J6363F GND 24V 42 38 1 2 1 2 1 2 J6369M J6369F 24...

Page 769: ...A35 B35 B36 A37 B37 A38 B38 A39 A1 B1 A2 B2 B3 A4 B4 B5 B6 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 VSS A16 P20 A17 P21 A18 P22 A19 P23 A20 P24 A21 P25 A22 P26 A23 P27 VSS WAIT P30 BACK P31 BREQ P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 VCC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B12 RESET A13 B13 A14 B14 A15 A16 B16 A17 B17 B16 A19 B19 A...

Page 770: ...GT CT1IN CT0IN CT0GT GND CT0OT PM84 PM83 PM82 PM81 GND VCC PM8EO PM8XE PM8CK GND PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM7EO PM7XE PM7CK GND VCC PM64 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM6EO PM6XE PM6CK GND PM54 PM53 PM52 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 OhpSens OhpSensOut FsrMtrOL FsrMtrErr JgMtrClk JgMtrEn JgMtrCntOut YodoMtrCntOut YodoMtrEn YodoMtrClk RegMtrCntClk RegMtrCntGate...

Page 771: ...5 0 ABUS 23 0 MRD TOMHWR TOMLWR HVSEL 1 2 3 16 4 14 6 12 1 8 Q2282 LS244 A4 Y4 A3 Y3 A2 Y2 A1 Y1 2 18 4 16 6 14 8 0 1 2 3 1 12 MrdlK HCLR HVSEL VCLK 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 17 34 NC NC 1 2 R2391 LED2204 1 2 R2392 LED2203 1 2 R2393 LED2202 1 2 R2394 LED2201 5V 5V 5V 5V Q2280 Q2308 Q2283 5 5 6 2 3 AKOUT D PR LS74 CLR Q Q CK 4 C2254 C2272 14 12 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 772: ...ens2 5 MtrayBeforSens1 6 MtrayBeforSens2 CP2269 CP2270 CP2204 CP2213 CP2214 CP2205 CP2202 CP2203 7 MfLeftSens 0 MfRightSens 1 MfUnitSens 2 RES_15_3 3 UpPaperSens 4 LoPaperSens 5 DeckPaperSens 6 MtrayPaperSens 7 UpCstSize0 0 UpCstSize1 1 LoCstSize0 2 LoCstSize1 3 RES_13_4 4 RES_13_5 5 RES_13_6 6 RES_13_7 7 MainSw 0 AcDet 1 RES_00_2 2 RES_00_3 3 FsrUpHeatSens 4 FsrLoHeatSens 5 FsrHeatErr 6 DrumHeatE...

Page 773: ...peed 5 ExitFan 4 PreFsrFan 3 PrimExhaustFan 2 PrimCornaFan 1 LsrFan 0 P55 P53 P31 P35 P41 P45 P43 P51 CP2212 81 82 83 84 3 2 1 0 85 86 87 88 89 0 1 2 3 90 91 92 4 5 6 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 7 4 5 6 3 2 C23 C22 C21 C20 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 GND VDO B25 B26 B27 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 C24 C25 C26 C27 GND A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 REST GND CS0 CS1 CS2 LBH HRB 80 79 78 77 4 5 6 7 76 75 74 73 72 ...

Page 774: ... B10 C10 C11 C12 C13 GND C14 C15 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ChkLed0 ChkLed1 ChkLed2 ChkLed3 ChkLed4 ChkLed5 ChkLed6 ChkLed7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ChkOut0 ChkOut1 ChkOut2 ChkOut3 ChkOut4 ChkOut5 ChkOut6 ChkOut7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ChkKey0 ChkKey1 ChkKey2 ChkKey3 RES_72_4 RES_72_5 RES_72_6 RES_72_7 0 ...

Page 775: ...5 z_DB7 J2205 z_DB8 J2205 z_DB9 J2205 z_DB10 J2205 z_DB11 J2205 z_DB12 J2205 z_DB13 J2205 z_DB14 J2205 z_DB15 J2205 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 5V Q2389 RA2230 LS245 DIR G A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 A5 A6 A7 A8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 B5 B6 B7 B8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5V RA2210 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RA2213 RA2211 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5V Q2402 RA2229 LS245 DIR G A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3...

Page 776: ...0 11 Q2385 R2227 J2206 PCMD2 A5 J2206 PSTS2 A7 RXD2 TXD2 5V LS19 11 10 Q2384 LS06 8 9 Q2385 R2229 R2855 J2206 RCPRDY A9 J2206 DCPRDY B1 RCPRDY DCPRDY 5V LS19 9 8 Q2384 LS06 6 5 Q2385 R2231 J2206 RPORT1 B3 J2206 OPORT1 B5 RPORT1 OPORT1 5V LS19 5 6 Q2384 LS06 4 3 Q2385 R2230 J2206 RPORT2 B7 J2206 DPORT2 B9 RPORT2 DPORT2 LS06 2 1 Q2385 LS19 1 2 Q2384 J2206 J2206 J2206 J2206 J2206 J2206 J2206 J2206 J2...

Page 777: ...2 J2202 ChkLed0 ChkLed1 ChkLed2 ChkLed3 2 18 4 16 6 14 8 1 ChkLed0 ChkLed1 ChkLed2 ChkLed3 12 A2 A3 A4 A5 Q2451 LS240 G A4 Y4 A3 Y3 A2 Y2 A1 Y1 J2202 J2202 J2202 J2202 ChkLed4 ChkLed5 ChkLed6 ChkLed7 11 9 13 7 15 5 17 19 ChkLed4 ChkLed5 ChkLed6 ChkLed7 3 A6 A7 A8 A9 Q2455 LS240 G Y4 A4 Y3 A3 Y2 A2 Y1 A1 J2202 J2202 J2202 J2202 ChkKey0 ChkKey1 ChkKey2 ChkKey3 18 2 16 4 14 6 12 1 ChkKey0 ChkKey1 Chk...

Page 778: ...607028 DRUM TEMP Y 60702A DRUM TEMP M 60702C DRUM TEMP C 60702E DRUM TEMP K 607030 FSR TEMP U 607032 FSR TEMP L 607034 OPT TEMP 607036 MF PR W 607038 U PR W 60703A L PR W 60703C PR THCK1 60703E PR THCK2 5V Q2311 1 16 2 15 3 14 4 13 5 4 6 7 5 12 2 1 0 3 6 11 7 10 8 9 4 VDO 6 2 COM 1 7 0 5 3 INH A VEE B VSS C 4 3 2 1 11 ZD2212 R2458 Q2304 R2826 C2281 D2212 D2211 1 2 1 2 HBAN0 5V Q2317 1 16 2 15 3 14...

Page 779: ... Q2275 C2298 C2260 C2285 R2500 R2215 R2214 R2405 R2506 CP2225 10 SaltLGM 9 8 9V 5V 5V SaltRefMin 4 10 9 8 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 SaltSigMin 9V 9V 9V 9V 9V R2488 4 13 12 14 9V 4 Q2301 2 3 1 9V 4 Q2301 5 6 7 SaltLGY SaltLGM 9V 4 Q2301 9 10 8 9V 4 Q2301 12 13 14 SaltLGC SaltLGK 9V 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 SaltLedM Q2406 Q2404 Q2300 1 2 3 4 5 DA31LD 6 DA3CLK 7 DA3DATA 8 9 10 11 12 VIN8 VOUT8 VOUT7 VIN7 GND RESET V...

Page 780: ... R2466 R2471 R2468 R2478 R2476 C2323 R2580 Q2322 C2290 Q2429 DA2244 DA2242 1 2 3 Q2432 1 2 3 AtrLedC 4 10 9 8 11 9V 9V A12 A13 A14 AtrSigMin ATRSG M J2229 ATRREF M J2229 ATRLON M J2229 A11 J2229 CP2230 CP2228 R2398 R2402 R2224 R2225 A10 J2229 A9 J2229 Q2276 R2397 4 13 12 14 11 9V 4 5 AtrLstd 6 7 11 9V Q2276 4 12 13 14 11 9V AtrRefM Q2298 C2257 R2399 C2258 R2401 1 2 14 5V R2474 4 10 AtrSigMout 9 8 ...

Page 781: ...cM J2216 CP2237 R2218 R2561 24R 24R C2314 4 9 10 8 11 3 1 1 2 14 5V EpcC DA2252 CP2278 EPC C C2315 R2569 R2565 Q2426 R2559 R2563 R2556 2 C VR2201 R2571 R2566 R2555 24R B3 GNDR J2216 B1 24VR J2216 B2 EpcC J2216 CP2217 R2207 R2560 24R 24R C2313 4 13 12 14 11 3 1 1 2 14 5V EpcK DA2250 CP2277 EPC K C2308 R2539 R2542 Q2426 R2547 R2545 R2552 2 K VR2202 R2540 R2537 R2551 24R B8 GNDR J2216 B6 24VR J2216 B...

Page 782: ...463 Q2454 Q2334 3 HC04 2 1 5 4 11 1 1 D HC374 OUTPUT CONTROL Q CK Q2336 5 6 RegMtrCntOut 3 1 2 15 4 J K PR HC112 CLR Q Q CK Q2334 2 3 11 D HC374 OUTPUT CONTROL Q CK HC04 5V 5V 4 5 Q2463 Q2464 Q2334 6 HC04 4 3 9 8 11 1 1 D HC374 OUTPUT CONTROL Q CK Q2334 5 7 11 D HC374 OUTPUT CONTROL Q CK 1 Q2335 5 6 2 3 D PR HC74 CLR Q Q CK HC04 9 10 Q2463 Q2464 Q2334 8 HC04 6 15 14 11 1 1 D HC374 OUTPUT CONTROL Q...

Page 783: ...B8 EVTEMP 5V R2233 R2237 R2235 DA2202 C2227 B9 EVHUM R2232 R2236 R2234 DA2201 C2226 EnvTemp EnvHum 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 J2207 B10 EVRMT 1 2 3 EnvSel Q2386 J2207 A15 OHPLED 1 2 3 OhpLed Q2387 DA2205 Reg1Sens OhpSens R2247 R2409 R2244 R2345 R2249 R2252 R2242 R2832 R2250 R2348 R2350 R2342 5V 1 2 14 DA2204 5V 5V 9V 9V R2410 5V 5V 5V 24R 3 11 10 1 2 13 12 Q2413 4 9 10 8 11 Q2388 4 13 12 14 PThickSens1 11 Q2...

Page 784: ... Q2246 1 2 3 PriExhaustFan A3 M2 A J2208 R2275 Q2248 1 2 3 A4 M2 B J2208 R2274 Q2251 1 2 3 A6 M2 B J2208 A5 24V J2208 A2 24V J2208 R2273 Q2250 1 2 3 5V J2208 B1 SMRDY 5V R2268 R2267 5V 24U R2278 Q2268 LS244 G A4 Y4 A3 Y3 A2 Y2 A1 Y1 11 9 13 7 15 5 17 19 RegMtrPls1 RegMtrPls2 RegMtrPls3 RegMtrPls4 MtrSel1 3 RA2207 2 3 4 5 A7 M3 A J2208 R2272 Q2253 1 2 3 A9 M3 A J2208 R2271 Q2252 1 2 3 A10 M3 B J220...

Page 785: ...J2209 R2367 Q2204 1 2 3 HopClK B6 CL4D J2209 R2371 R2336 Q2201 1 2 3 HopClK2 TnrSensY B7 CL5D 5VM GND J2209 B10 YTEP J2209 J2209 J2209 24U B2 J2209 B1 R2294 Q2241 1 2 3 FsrWebOnSl A7 SL4D J2209 A8 J2209 A10 J2209 A15 J2209 B9 J2209 5V R2289 DA2217 R2290 R2339 FsrUpTemp 5V R2286 R2284 R2282 DA2216 R2288 FsrLoTemp OilSens FsrUnitSens 5U A12 J2209 RA2209 5V 2 3 4 5 1 A11 THM2 J2209 A13 OEP J2209 A14 ...

Page 786: ...6 B R2301 R2307 Q2236 1 2 3 24U 5V G RegMtrPls1 LS244 RegMtrPls2 RegMtrPls3 RegMtrPls4 MtrSel3 RA2204 Q2267 2 3 4 5 9 7 5 3 A4 A3 A2 A1 11 13 15 17 19 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 J2210 B1 J2210 B2 M7 A R2310 Q2228 1 2 3 J2210 B3 M7 A R2309 Q2227 1 2 3 J2210 B4 M7 B R2312 Q2226 1 2 3 J2210 B6 J2210 B5 M7 B R2311 R2316 Q2225 1 2 3 24U 5V G RegMtrPls1 LS244 RegMtrPls2 RegMtrPls3 RegMtrPls4 MtrSel4 RA2202 Q2266 2 3 4...

Page 787: ... B R2322 Q2217 1 2 3 RvsMtrPls4 Rvs Unit J2211 R2330 RA2201 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 B5 PS35DT J2211 A11 PS34DT J2211 A9 PS32DT J2211 A10 PS33DT R2326 R2324 R2321 5V 2 3 4 5 C2237 DA2222 DA2220 DA2219 C2236 5V 24U J2211 J2211 5U J2211 J2211 J2211 J2211 5U 24U DA2223 FsrJamSens ExhstSens RevSens1 RevSens2 2 1 14 5V 5V DA2317 2 1 14 2 1 14 2 1 14 ...

Page 788: ...7 1 2 3 A8 SL17CDO J2212 R2848 Q2488 1 2 3 B8 CNT1 J2212 R2368 R2373 Q2202 1 2 3 Count1 CountErr B9 CNT2 J2212 R2369 Q2203 1 2 3 Count2 B10 CNT3 J2212 R2366 Q2206 1 2 3 Count3 B11 CNT4 J2212 R2365 Q2205 1 2 3 Count4 B12 CNT5 J2212 R2363 Q2209 1 2 3 Count5 B13 CNT6 J2212 FRDC J2212 R2362 Q2208 1 2 3 Count6 5V B7 24VU J2212 A3 J2212 A6 J2212 A9 J2212 A10 SL17KDC J2212 R2846 Q2489 1 2 3 A11 SL17KDO J...

Page 789: ...13 B5 YDRHD J2213 B6 M3OB J2213 B3 CDRHD J2213 B4 MDRHD J2213 B1 CSTHD J2213 B2 KDRHD J2213 2 1 14 5V 5V R2389 DA2235 R2390 5V A5 M9PLL A4 FsrMtrPll FsrMtr 2 1 14 5V R2385 DA2234 R2382 5V 5U A9 M10PLL A8 FeedMtrPll J2213 A6 M9D J2213 A7 J2213 J2213 J2213 J2213 A11 J2213 1 2 3 Q2395 1 2 3 Q2396 J2213 M10D 1 2 3 Q2398 J2213 M9PLS 1 2 3 Q2399 J2213 M9CLK J2213 M9CD 3 5 4 FsrMtrRef 2 FsrMtrErr 12 5V 5...

Page 790: ...V 5V 1 2 3 R2857 R2388 R2206 R2387 R2205 R2386 R2384 R2420 R2381 C2249 C2266 C2248 PreFsrFanSpeed R2445 PreFsrFan PreFixMtrPls4 PreFixMtrPls1 PreFixMtrPls3 PreFixMtrPls2 OUTA VrefA INA VSA RSA OUTB TaB GND INB 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 TaA GND INA OUTA RSB VSB VrefB INB OUTB C2250 Q2264 R2383 B2 PS8DT J2214 B1 B3 5U J2214 J2214 2 1 14 R2380 DA2233 MtrayBeforSens1 R2377 B5 PS9DT ...

Page 791: ...HvSortAc Q2416 A10 HVSPAC J2215 A9 HVSPEN J2215 4 5 HvSubDcY 6 7 A4 HVSUBY 11 Q2415 R2444 CP2216 R2440 R2436 24R J2215 4 3 HvSubDcK 2 1 B5 HVPPRC 11 Q2414 R2421 CP2211 R2425 R2446 R2429 24R J2215 4 12 HvGridK 13 14 B6 HVGRC 11 Q2414 R2423 CP2210 R2427 R2431 24R 24R J2215 4 10 HvGridY 9 8 A5 HVGRY 11 Q2415 R2442 CP2215 C2268 R2438 R2434 24R J2215 2 3 HvPrimY Q2417 A6 HVPRY 24VR GNDR J2215 B11 J2215...

Page 792: ...217 A6 HVAC Y J2217 A7 24VR J2217 A8 GNDR 1 2 3 HvDevAcY Q2447 4 10 HvDevDconK 9 8 B1 HVDCEN K 11 Q2435 R2611 J2217 J2217 CP2243 R2609 R2607 24R B2 HVDC K 1 2 3 HvDevDcK Q2436 J2217 B3 HVAC K 1 2 3 HvDevAcK Q2438 4 5 HvDevDconC 6 7 B4 HVDCEN C 11 Q2435 R2612 J2217 J2217 CP2244 R2610 R2608 24R 4 5 HvPreFsrDc 6 7 B10 HVPRF 11 Q2444 R2636 J2217 CP22xx R2634 R2632 24R 24R B5 HVDC C 1 2 3 HvDevDcC Q243...

Page 793: ...13 B1 B2 A10 PS12DT PS13DT PS10DT PS11DT PS14DT PS15DT z_TrnsUnitSens M15PLL A9 M15DIR 1 2 3 VfMtr Q2453 A11 M15ON 24R 4 3 HvInElmDc 2 1 B9 HVEL 11 Q2444 R2625 CP2260 R2628 R2630 24R J2218 4 12 HvTrnsK 13 14 B8 HVTR K 11 Q2446 R2638 CP2252 R2640 R2842 24R J2218 4 10 HvTrnsC 9 8 B7 HVTR C 11 Q2446 R2647 CP2250 R2645 R2643 24R J2218 4 5 HvTrnsM 6 7 B6 HVTR M 11 Q2446 R2648 CP2251 R2646 R2644 24R J22...

Page 794: ...L7CDS R2817 Q2346 1 2 3 BUpSlC_A 8 SL7CDR R2815 Q2348 1 2 3 BUpSlC_R 9 SL7KDS R2813 Q2360 1 2 3 BUpSlK_A 10 SL7KDR R2811 Q2362 1 2 3 BUpSlK_R A3 M13A R2707 Q2329 1 2 3 YodoMtrPls2 A4 M13B R2704 Q2330 1 2 3 YodoMtrPls3 A6 M13B A5 24U R2703 Q2331 1 2 3 YodoMtrPls4 24U 5U A7 A8 J2219 J2219 C2373 C2386 C2387 C2385 DA2280 DA2282 DA2281 C2372 R2710 RA2226 J2219 B1 PS16DT J2219 B2 PS17DT J2219 B3 PS18DT ...

Page 795: ...222 B7 PS23DT J2222 B8 PS24DT J2222 B9 PS25DT J2222 B10 PS26DT J2222 B11 PS27DT J2222 B12 PS28DT J2222 J2222 A3 SL8D R2696 Q2364 1 2 3 ReFeedPickUp J2222 A4 CL10D R2697 Q2363 1 2 3 ReFeedCl J2222 A5 J2222 A6 CL11D J2222 A7 M16ON R2698 R2805 R2907 R2804 R2806 R2908 Q2361 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 Reg2Cl UpCstLiftMtr 24U 24U A2 J2222 A1 Q2360 Q2362 ZD2207 ZD2208 D2210 J2222 A8 SL9D R2699 Q2359 1 2 3 UpPickU...

Page 796: ...90 J2223 J2223 B9 J2223 B11 J2223 B13 J2223 J2223 B14 B8 MtrayMtr 1 2 3 Q2475 M19ON B15 CL16D R2775 Q2370 1 2 3 RvsDriveCl A13 STECD CPUCLKA R2788 Q2367 1 2 3 DeckTrnsCl A12 STPCD R2785 Q2368 1 2 3 Q2369 1 2 3 DeckFeedCl Deck Driver 2 J2223 C2379 2 1 14 5V R2784 DA2309 5V A9 LFLM J2223 R2786 C2378 2 1 14 5V R2780 DA2308 5V R2783 5V A8 DeckPaperSens PRSD DeckPickUpSl LTP J2223 A7 A6 STPE J2223 R278...

Page 797: ... 14 5V R2753 DA2305 R2752 5V 5U B8 B7 5VM PS29DT NC B9 J2224 B10 J2224 J2224 J2224 MtrayJogSens R2759 Q2381 1 2 3 MtrayShutSl R B1 M23 A J2224 R2679 Q2373 1 2 3 JgMtrPls3 B2 M23 A J2224 R2678 Q2376 1 2 3 JgMtrPls1 B5 M23 B J2224 R2677 Q2379 1 2 3 JgMtrPls2 B6 M23 B J2224 J2224 R2764 Q2372 1 2 3 JgMtrPls4 A11 SL12DS J2224 R2761 Q2378 1 2 3 MtrayShutSl A A13 SL13D J2224 A12 J2224 A14 J2224 R2763 Q23...

Page 798: ... J2225 B12 J2225 R2745 19 19 Q2457 LS240 BfrSl2 7 13 Q2457 J2225 A5 J2225 A6 BfrSl2 HpSel J2225 A4 LS240 BfrHpSel 9 11 19 19 Q2457 J2225 A7 BfrMfrend LS240 BfrEnb 12 8 1 Q2457 LS240 BfeSl1 14 6 Q2457 J2225 A9 J2225 A10 BfrSl1 BfrCl J2225 A8 LS240 BfrCl 16 4 1 1 Q2457 LS240 18 2 1 Q2457 2 1 14 5V 5V R2741 C2374 5V 24U B11 J2225 24U LS240 15 B1 BfrJamSens 5 BfrJamSens Q2458 DA2302 R2751 J2225 R2749 ...

Page 799: ...1PLL M21ON J2226 C2SZ1 C1PW GNDR GNDR R2673 R2674 R2734 R2733 R2737 DA2297 DA2296 DA2294 DA2295 R2738 R2740 R2739 R2735 R2736 R2723 R2722 C2363 C2364 DA2270 DA2271 C2PW J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 J2226 C2SZ0 C1SZ0 J2226 J2226 C1SZ1 R2732 Q2472 J2226 J2226 DA2293 M18YON Q2470 R2728 DA2291 M18YPLL R2724 J2226 WstTnrMtrPll UpCstSize0 UpCstSize1 LoCstSize0 LoCstS...

Page 800: ...C24VRmt AcDet z_AcDet z_PowerSel PowerSel z_OH_24R z_OH_5U OH_5U OH_24R z_PowerFanErr PowerFanErr R2714 G2468 DA2285 DA2286 R2716 D2205 CP2224 24R 12V 12V Q2258 Q2265 Q2312 D2203 D2204 D2207 RGV5 RGV5 RGV15 Q2274 Q2273 R2765 5U_Err 24U_Err J2201 J2221 J2221 J2221 J2221 J2221 J2221 J2221 J2227 J2227 J2227 J2227 J2227 J2227 J2227 J2227 J2227 J2227 24VF GND_F J2227 J2234 J2234 J2234 J2234 J2234 J2234...

Page 801: ...LS240 LS244 LS244 LS245 LS245 HC157 HC74 HC136 HC32 LS32 LS374 LS74 LS74 Q2600 Q2601 Q2602 Q2389 Q2402 Q2603 Q2604 Q2401 Q2281 Q2305 Q2481 Q2299 Q2397 Q2270 Q2424 Q2422 Q2442 Q2421 Q2280 Q2269 Q2408 Q2428 Q2279 Q2306 Q 2277 Q2278 Q2385 Q2384 Q2334 Q2464 Q2465 Q2593 Q2302 Q2335 Q2337 Q2336 Q2591 Q2592 Q2463 Q2333 Q2266 Q2267 Q2268 Q2457 Q2458 Q2425 Q2282 Q2473 Q2451 Q2455 Q2452 Q2461 Q2462 Q2450 C2...

Page 802: ...p1 FsrHeatUp2 FsrWebMtr CstHeatUp Q2299 Q2299 C2381 Q2286 Q2462 Q2462 C2216 R2514 C2215 C2389 C2388 R2519 Q2292 Q2289 Q2289 R2516 Q2286 C2333 C2334 FsrLoTemp 24V 2 3 4 1 11 VL 24v 24v 5V R2906 5V 5V 5V VH 5V 7 6 3 3 12 1 4 5 3 3 12 12 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 VS STPO RESET GND CR OUT VCC VS STPO RESET GND CR OUT VCC TIME up OUT L 8 9 10 11 11 12 13 13 1 2 3 3 2 1 12 11 5V 9 8 5 6 4 10 13 0 0 ...

Page 803: ...12 13 8 11 Q2592 Q2592 Q2591 Q2593 R2531 ErrClr ErrClr DrumHeatErr DrumHeatY DrumHeatM DrumHeatC DrumHeatK z_DrumHeatY z_DrumHeatM z_DrumHeatC z_DrumHeatK RA2235 G2397 LS244 11 13 15 17 9 7 5 3 2 3 4 5 19 11 13 12 2 3 4 9 4 5 6 8 9 10 CLK152 5V A4 A3 A2 A1 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V VL VL VL VL 6 7 1 4 5 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 10 13 11 8 9 14 1 2 13 14 6 7 4 5 10 11 8 9...

Page 804: ... M1CCW KeySw ShutOffErr AutoSnut MfLiftMtrCw MfLiftMtrCcw DA2218 R2291 R2298 Q2392 R2836 D2202 ZD2202 R2292 R2296 Q2237 Z2201 24V 24V 24V 24V 5V 5V 5V 24V 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 5 7 8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 VCC NC IN1 IN2 OUT1 OUT2 GND Z2208 24V 3 2 1 4 5 7 8 VCC NC IN1 IN2 OUT1 OUT2 GND S OPND S CLSD J2241 J2241 J2241 J2241 J2241 J2241 J2241 S CLS S O...

Page 805: ... A30 90 89 88 B28 B27 87 86 85 RES STBY MMI VSS 00 P10 01 P11 02 P12 03 P13 04 P14 05 P15 06 P16 07 P17 08 09 010 011 012 013 014 015 VSS A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 M02 M01 M00 VCC RFBH LNR HNR RO AS E Q VSS XTAL EXTAL VSS P87 TX02 P86 RX02 P85 TX01 P84 RX01 PB3 SCK2 IAQ3 PB2 SCK1 IAQ2 PB1 IIR01 PB0 IIR00 VCC AVCC P73 AN3 P72 AN2 P71 AN1 P70 AN0 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 VSS A16 P20 A17 P21 A18 P...

Page 806: ... 20 21 22 23 22 21 20 3 2 1 C B A 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A34 A33 A32 A31 A29 A28 A27 A26 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A24 A23 A22 A21 A19 A...

Page 807: ...P OB7 OB6 OB5 OB4 OB3 OB2 OB1 OB0 VSS VOO REG7 REG6 REG5 REG4 REG3 REG2 REG1 REG0 SCLK C1349 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 PI02 PI03 RSV72 RSV78 IPALL IPED IPDSP IFMAN RSVD IPECO RSVDO IPC1 IPC2 LMPERR VSS LEDSCN0 LEDSCN1 LEDSCN2 LEDSCN3 LEDSCN4 LEDSCN5 LEDSCN6 SIF LCDC RJVFD VRAM VSS LEDON0 LEDON1 LEDON2 ROM1 CS ROM2 CS ROM3 CS ROM4 CS R...

Page 808: ...4 5 6 7 8 9 A 23 0 C1341 D 15 0 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V RA1329 RA1328 RA1314 C1344 C1338 X1303 RST RA1315 IPC0 RXD3 IPC0CS H8RD H8LWR IPC0 TXD3 IPC0 RXD2 IPC0 TXD2 IPC0 RXD1 IPC0 TXD1 Q1320 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 DQ1 DQ0 W R S BM INTR RXD3 TXD3 RXD2 TXD2 RXD1 TXD1 CTS3 CTS2 CTS1 CLK P12 A7 PA0 PA1 PA2 PA4 PA3 PA5 PA6 PA7 P80 P81 P82 P83 P84 P85 P86 P87 ...

Page 809: ...0 LS06 HC240 LS06 LS240 LS19 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 19 1 1 1 1 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 24V R1302 Q1339 Q1345 IPC0 RXD3 C1303 C1312 R1375 LED1301 3 4 2 1 1 2 1 2 C1301 C1314 R1376 R1338 R1337 Q1302 LED1302 Z1 CCVCNCT Z0 CCVCNCT 5 1 2 3 CCD CCDT 1 2 1 3 2 4 6 2 1 2 1 24V C1302 C1313 R1377 LED1303 Z0 CNTP IPC0 TXD3 R1346 R1301 Q1325 Q1345 Q1326 Q1325 Q1337 DA1326 Q1331 Q1372 C1360 R1367 R1362 R1303...

Page 810: ...5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 1 2 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 2 1 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 A01 A00 C07 C06 C...

Page 811: ...S19 8 9 B5 5V 5V Q1338 R1339 R1340 ZI XDPORT1 z_DPORT1 LS19 6 5 B2 5V 5V Q1338 R1312 R1313 ZI XDPORT2 z_DPORT2 LS19 12 13 A4 5V 5V Q1339 R1349 R1350 IPC1 RXD2 z PSTS2 LS19 10 11 B10 5V 5V Q1339 R1347 R1348 ZI XDCPRDY z_DCPRDY LS19 LS06 5 6 B8 A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 B1 B3 B5 B7 B9 Q1337 ZO XRPORT1 z_RPORT1 J1307 LS06 3 4 B4 Q1337 ZO XRPORT2 z_RPORT2 LS06 9 8 A2 Q1337 ZI XRCPROY z_RCPRDY LS06 11 10 A5 Q1337...

Page 812: ...7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 44 43 42 41 A 23 0 C1346 Q1352 Q1322 Q1319 C1347 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 0 1 2 3 37 38 39 40 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 69 68 67 66 65 MA6 MA7 MA8 MA9 MA10 MA11 MA12 MA13 MA14 MA15 DIV T5T2 T5T1 Vss XT XT CEO CLP FRMB LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3 Vdd UD0 UD1 UD2 UD3 CHO BUSY DIEN ADF 10 13 16 8 5V 5V 5V 5V 14 12 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7...

Page 813: ...15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 7 5 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 1 HSYNC ZO GATEO HCPUCLK IPU MLT CLK NC NC NC D3 D2 NC D1 D0 CLK0 OUT0 NC NC NC NC WR VDD NC D7 D6 D5 D4 NC NC NC NC GATE1 OUT1 IC GND GATE0 NC NC NC NC RD CS A1 A0 NC CLK2 OUT2 GATE2 CLK1 NC Q1318 Q1317 UPD71051G ZO OMFN_ON OM PULSE Q1340 FM10 13D R1321 R1322 Q1339 Q1339 M29CLK OMITOP Q1340...

Page 814: ... 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 19 LS245 Q1365 Q1364 RA1333 RA1343 RA1338 DIR G 5V 5V 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 72 73 74 75 64 78 79 80 2 3 4 5 6 7 13 12 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 19 1 LS541 Q1366 RA1337 RA1342 RA1332 Q1345 G2 G1 5V 5V 2 3 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 53 77 17 3 51 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 66 71 76 81 86 91 96 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1...

Page 815: ... 5V ZI LAMPERR ZO LAMPON R1333 R1334 Q1301 Q1304 C1315 C1304 LAMOUT R1326 R1328 R1327 C1316 R1329 C1320 C1317 R1332 Q1329 Q1330 LAERR LAON A7 A8 R1330 R1331 Q1341 LINT Q1341 15V 24V A9 A10 A11 A12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 12 12 13 13 10 11 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V LS06 LS19 LS19 B3 B2 B1 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 LS06 R1335 Q1325 DZ_TXD DZ_RXD DZ_REQ...

Page 816: ...15 5V ZI RTN8 ZI RTN9 ZI RTN10 ZI RTN11 ZI RTN12 ZI RTN13 ZI RTN14 ZI RTN15 ZI RTN16 ZI RTN17 ZI RTN18 ZI RTN19 Q1349 Q1349 Q1349 Q1349 14 15 16 3 2 1 5V C1340 9 8 COM GMD ZO SCAN0 ZO SCAN1 ZO SCAN2 ZO SCAN3 ZO SCAN4 ZO SCAN5 ZO SCAN6 ZO SCAN7 ZO SCAN8 ZO SCAN9 ZO SCAN10 ZO SCAN11 2 4 6 8 LS244 A4 A3 A2 A1 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 G 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 LS244 A4 A3 A2 A1 Y4 Y...

Page 817: ... A12 A11 A10 A9 Vss A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Vcc A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 Vss A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Vcc A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 Vss A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Vcc A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 Vss A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33...

Page 818: ...E A13 A8 A9 A11 CS2 A10 CS1 I O8 I O7 I O6 I O5 I O4 C1345 8 9 10 A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 I O1 I O2 I O3 GND A14 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 I O1 I O2 I O3 GND YCC WE A13 A8 A9 A11 CS2 A10 CS1 I O8 I O7 I O6 I O5 I O4 YCC WE A13 A8 A9 A11 OE A10 CS1 I O8 I O7 I O6 I O5 I O4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 28 27 26 ...

Page 819: ...1356 C1354 C1357 C1353 C1359 C1342 C1355 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 1 1 2 3 4 11 11 8 11 11 11 10 10 12 13 9 10 12 13 13 13 14 15 15 7 7 19 19 19 19 19 19 HC32 HC32 HC08 HC08 HC240 HC240 HC240 LS240 LS240 LS240 LS240 Q1340 Q1358 Q1358 Q1347 Q1347 Q1326 Q1326 Q1326 Q1331 Q1331 Q1331 LS19 LS19 LS19 LS19 LS19 LS06 LS06 Q1325 Q1325 Q1372 Q1372 Q1372 Q1372 Q1372 PASS CON EXTRA ...

Page 820: ... 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Q2005 Q2007 Q2008 Q2010 Q2009 Q2012 Q2006 FTGB F1R F2R F1RG F2RG F1GB F2GB F1B F2B FTGR FTGG C2003 C2017 C2004 C2013 C2009 C2007 C2010 C2006 C2008 C2005 7V 7V 7V 7V 7V 7V 7V R CP R CP1F F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 FTG HD29029DP NC IA V IB NC OA V OB HD29029DP NC IA V IB NC OA V OB HD29029DP NC IA V IB NC OA V OB H...

Page 821: ...26 Q2041 3 EX W2ODD GREEN ODD Q2040 Q2017 C2022 R2110 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V R2082 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 2 2 1 3 OSAR R2073 1 R2104 Q2025 5 6 Q2039 3 2 EX W1ODD RED ODD Q2038 Q2018 C2023 R2106 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 11 12 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V R2081 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 2 2 1 3 OSBB R2037 R2096 Q2023 Q2035 3 EX W2EVEN BLUE EVEN Q2034 Q2020 C2025 R2098 R2077 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 2 2 1 3 OSBR R2039 R2100 Q2024 Q2037 ...

Page 822: ...B R2036 C2064 F1GB F2GB FTGG C2065 R F2R F1R FTGR F2RG F1RG CP1F R2035 C2063 C2066 CP R2034 12V 12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 VOD OSBG OSBR OSAR VDD1 FAICP FAIR VSS1 OP OP OP IC OP OP OP FAI2R FAI1R TP2 TP1 FAITRG FAI2RG FAI1RG VSS2 VSS4 OSAG OSAB OSBB VDD2 DG FAI1F VSS3 OP OP OP IC OP OP OP OP FAI2B FAI1...

Page 823: ...PRIME AU JAPON A 69 APPENDIX CCD Driver Circuit Diagram 4 4 C2074 2 3 Q2028 IN 1 OUT GND D2001 C2069 C2070 12V 7V 1 2 3 12V 12V J2001 VS1 1028013 5V 6 7 J2001 VS1 1028013 J2001 VS1 1028013 J2001 J2001 5 J2001 J VS1 1028013 4 J2001 VS1 1028013 from ANALOG PROCESSOR from ANALOG PROCESSOR ...

Page 824: ... R4134 24VR H_GND J4103 D4105 R4130 T1 110 24VR 24VR 24VR 24VR R4115 C4111 IC4103 R4107 R4282 R4106 R4113 D4102 R4266 R4103 R4102 24VR R4101 C4101 IC4101 24V IC4101 C4107 R4104 24VR 24VR R4156 R4264 R4145 R4155 D4113 R4267 T4102 T2 24VR 110 C4121 4 1 2 5 T4101 4 1 2 5 6 3 6 3 Q4106 R4152 C4114 R4141 D4112 R4168 ZD4104 Q4105 D4114 D4111 24VR C4115 R4161 R4162 C4106 R4116 C4118 24VR 24VR 24VR IC4102...

Page 825: ...VR Q4115 Q4116 C4138 R4208 R4209 C4139 D4123 R4207 24VU 24VR 24VR R4292 24VR IC4106 C4137 R4230 R4231 R4214 R4284 R4229 R4211 C4134 R4227 R4225 1 2 3 8 4 7 6 5 8 4 C4156 R4199 24VR R4197 R4198 R4274 IC4107 R4173 R4179 R4196 R4193 R4271 R4189 R4194 D4115 R4273 T4103 T3 24VR 110 C4129 2 5 4 1 6 3 Q4109 R4177 C4124 R4195 D4119 D4120 R4232 Q4112 D4115 ZD4109 24VR 24VR 24VR D4121 D4137 HV1_REM T_CONTRO...

Page 826: ...4145 R4277 R4259 Q4117 D4133 ZD4111 24VR 24VR 24VR D4130 D4146 H_GND T_CONTROL_1 T_CONTROL_2 T_CONTROL_3 T_CONTROL_4 INNER_CONTROL HV1_REM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HV1_REM D4141 ZD4113 C4147 C4148 C4161 R4288 24VR 24VR Q4118 Q4119 C4143 R4238 R4239 VR4101 C4159 D4132 R4285 24VU R4293 R4263 ZD4112 R4262 Q4121 24VU 24VR IC4108 C4141 R4251 R4247 24VR R4244 R4287 R4285 R4279 R4278 C4146 R4250 R4249 1 3 2 8 4 7...

Page 827: ...621 R4641 R4640 C4616 24VR 24VU 24VU R4616 R4619 LED4602 R4618 Q4602 R4617 D4606 R4621 R4620 D4608 C4610 C4612 C4611 R4615 D4607 D4605 R4601 24VR 13 15 7 10 5 4 12 18 14 11 3 8 2 16 17 19 1 9 20 R4613 R4697 24VR R4649 R4648 R4699 R4698 D4627 Q4613 24VR R4611 J4607 FF2 3441 T4602 AUX 110 C4603 R4603 1 4 5 2 6 3 C4605 ZD4601 R4602 ZD4603 R4624 Q4603 24VU 3 4 6 5 2 1 R4605 R4607 LED4601 R4606 Q4601 R...

Page 828: ...R4688 C4642 24VR 24VU R4664 R4667 LED4604 R4666 Q4608 R4665 D4619 R4669 R4668 D4621 C4636 C4638 C4637 R4663 D4620 EMO1 D4618 R4650 24VR 13 15 7 10 5 4 12 18 14 11 3 8 2 16 17 19 1 9 20 R4661 24VR R4696 R4695 T4605 AUX 110 C4629 R4652 1 4 5 2 6 3 C4631 ZD4606 R4651 ZD4608 R4672 Q4609 24VU R4654 R4656 LED4603 R4655 D4607 R4657 D4615 R4659 R4673 R4675 C4641 R4674 Q4610 Q4611 R4658 FH3 0651 D4617 C463...

Page 829: ...z HV_FORWARD HV_BACK DETECT_1 DC_REMOTE_1 CANCEL DETECT_1 CANCEL DETECT_1 R4764 R4772 R4736 24VU 24VR 20VR R4888 24VR R4723 R4865 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 D4707 C4708 C4707 Q4702 Q4711 Q4703 Q4701 C4751 C4750 Q4710 C4703 R4742 R4720 D4709 D4708 R4721 C4752 C4709 T4703 T4704 D4705 D4705 D4704 R4713 R4715 R4717 R4701 R4714 R4767 R4867 R4777 R4747 ...

Page 830: ...V_BACK DC_CONTROL_2 DC_REMOTE_2 WBP_REMOTE_2 DC_CONTROL_1 DC_REMOTE_1 WBP_REMOTE_1 CANCEL DETECT_2 CANCEL DETECT_2 R4845 R4853 R4822 24VU 24VR 20VR R4891 24VR 24VU 24VR R4809 R4882 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 D4727 C4732 C4731 Q4736 Q4745 Q4737 Q4735 C4754 C4762 Q4744 C4727 T4708 R4828 R4805 D4729 D4728 R4807 C4756 C4733 T4707 D4726 D4725 D4724 R47...

Page 831: ... GND 14 7 HC107 IC5008 5V VCC GND 14 7 HC107 IC5014 C5061 5V VCC GND 16 8 HC191 IC5016 5V VCC GND 14 7 HC00 IC5009 5V VCC GND 14 7 HC00 IC5010 5V VCC GND 14 7 HC00 ZD5001 R5007 R5017 R5011 R5012 36KHz Q5003 3 2 1 24VR R5008 R5009 5V 24VR R5002 R5001 1 1 2 3 4 5 GND ion oi VO Vin VC VO 2 3 VR5001 20VR NEG_TIMING ZERO_TIMING POS_TIMING R5018 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 J5001 A2 A1 J5001 11 LOAD HC191 IC5016 7...

Page 832: ...4 C5024 Q5007 3 2 1 Q5012 D5004 1KVA 1KVA 2 1 J5003 1KVB 1KVB 2 1 J5004 R5068 R5040 R5037 C5046 R5036 24VU C5027 C5044 C5028 C5035 D5005 D5008 D5006 20VR R5065 C5043 R5039 R5070 Q5010 R5107 3 2 1 R5029 R5030 20VR R5026 R5064 R5063 R5023 R5074 R5052 R5053 IC5013 IC5012 N IN ININ FB TCON Ct Rt GND C1 N IN ININ ROUT OCON Vcc C2 E2 E1 C5033 C5047 C5032 C5034 R5031 R5019 C5039 R5021 C5019 f 50KHz R5045...

Page 833: ...052 20VR R5090 ZD5006 20VR R5099 R5097 R5095 C5054 R5094 D5011 C5050 R5092 R5103 R5102 R5101 R5100 R5088 D5012 24VR 24VR IC5015 N IN ININ FB TCON Ct Rt GND C1 N IN ININ ROUT DCON Vcc C2 E2 E1 C5049 R5093 1 2 3 4 5 T5003 R5080 C5059 D5013 C5058 Q5014 Q5013 R5089 C5056 R5082 R5077 R5078 R5085 R5087 R5084 R5083 R5079 R5086 C5060 C5057 R5096 R5081 D5010 1 2 3 4 J5005 ...

Page 834: ... H G 1 2 3 C5101 C5127 C5116 C5117 R5108 R5132 150K 100H R5133 R5149 R5126 12KVp p 300uA D5110 R5147 R5151 R5150 R5155 T5102 RH3 0058 1 2 3 4 5 J5102 1 2 3 4 5 J5104 T5101 FH3 0777 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 5 4 C5126 24R R5146 J5101 1 2 C5122 OU 24U R5116 R5134 C5118 C5112 R5119 24R 24R 24R OU 24R IC5101 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 R5118 R5131 R5120 VR5101 R5121 C5123 C5121 C5119 R5122 R5115 ...

Page 835: ...25 R5206 R5208 R5202 R5205 R5212 L5201 Q5202 PROTECT I_CONTROL I_REMOTE PROTECT I_REMOTE I_CONTROL R5229 R5228 C5206 C5207 R5211 R5242 R5241 24VR 24VR R5240 D5207 R5239 24VR R5232 R5231 R5213 24VR 24VR R5237 24VR R5221 Vs R5224 T5201 500uA 7KV 110 5 2 1 4 6 3 24VR Q5204 R5235 R5226 C5213 D5206 R5227 W5201 R5238 R5220 Q5203 R5214 R5215 R5209 IC5201 R5216 R5219 C5216 Q5201 C5212 R5244 C5214 R5233 R5...

Page 836: ... of the laser from the laser unit to be use in combination with a digital multimeter Use it when adjusting the intensity of the laser from the laser unit to be use in combination with the laser power checker to adjust the intensity of the laser from the laser unit Do not remove the transfer assembly frame while the door switch is on Use it when removing the grip stop ring 4 to 9 mm Use it when che...

Page 837: ...ing images Use it when adjusting the position of No 1 No 2 mirrors to be used in combination with the mirror positioning tool rear For preventing peeling of the drum cleaning blade For adjusting the gap cylinder blade of developing assembly No 6 7 8 9 10 11 Tool Name Environment sensor checker Potential sensor checker terminal CA1 test sheet Mirror positioning tool front rear Drum cleaner blade lu...

Page 838: ...id breathing vapor Do not use for cleaning the drum plastic molded parts or corona wires Use in a well ventilated area and avoid breathing vapor Avoid contact with eyes or with skin Tool No CK 0427 500 g can equivalent grease may be used if able to withstand 200 C for extended periods of time Equivalent oil can be used Tool No CK 0451 100 cc Uniway 220 Nihon Sekiyu Tool No CK 0524 100 cc Alternati...

Page 839: ... ADVANCEMENT DEPT 5 OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS QUALITY ASSURANCE CENTER CANON INC Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon REVISION 0 SEPT 1996 23715 REVISION 1 MAY 1997 23715 REVISION 2 MAY 2001 23715 5 1 Hakusan 7 chome Toride shi Ibaraki 302 8501 Japan ...

Page 840: ...0501GR PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON This publication is printed on 100 reprocessed paper ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for 1000S

Reviews:

Related manuals for 1000S

Brands by name

Popular brands

Canon 1000S, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for 1000S

Reviews:

Related manuals for 1000S

Brands by name

Popular brands